[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2016092953A1 - Device - Google Patents

Device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016092953A1
WO2016092953A1 PCT/JP2015/079223 JP2015079223W WO2016092953A1 WO 2016092953 A1 WO2016092953 A1 WO 2016092953A1 JP 2015079223 W JP2015079223 W JP 2015079223W WO 2016092953 A1 WO2016092953 A1 WO 2016092953A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
band
uplink
mode
subframe
downlink
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/JP2015/079223
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
氎柀 錊
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Sony Corp
Original Assignee
Sony Corp
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Sony Corp filed Critical Sony Corp
Publication of WO2016092953A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016092953A1/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/04Error control
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to an apparatus.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • the UL / DL configuration ratio in a radio frame can be changed by dynamically changing the UL / DL configuration according to traffic. That is, in TDD, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL can be flexibly adjusted.
  • FDD Frequency Division Duplex
  • FDD Time Division Duplex
  • the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL cannot be flexibly adjusted.
  • FDD it is possible to use more DL bands and fewer UL bands by carrier aggregation, but as a result, the usage rate of radio resources in the UL band decreases and radio resources are used efficiently. I can't say that.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a technique for using an FDD UL band in a TDD mode.
  • the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
  • the switching unit for switching the operation mode for the uplink band, and a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • a control unit that notifies the terminal device of information.
  • the processor uses a first mode in which the FDD uplink band is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. Switching the operation mode for the uplink band between the mode and the information on the subframe for transmitting the ACK / NACK for the downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, Informing the terminal device.
  • a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division
  • An apparatus includes a control unit that performs processing and performs processing for downlink reception and uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, and the control unit acquires the second operation mode when the operation mode is the second mode. In the mode, processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data is performed based on the information on the subframe.
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a macrocell. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a small cell.
  • UL transmission timing adjustment (a) Timing Advance (TA)
  • TA Timing Advance
  • a base station for example, eNB (evolved Node B)
  • a terminal device for example, UE (User Equipment)
  • the UL transmission timing of each of the plurality of terminal devices is adjusted so that the reception timings of the UL signals from the plurality of terminal devices are synchronized.
  • the base station notifies the terminal device of a timing advance (TA) command, and the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing based on the TA command.
  • TA timing advance
  • (A-1) Initial value of TA
  • the terminal device includes a DL reception timing, based on the N TA, to adjust the UL transmission timing.
  • TA i.e., the difference of the UL transmission timing and DL reception timing
  • N TA * T S N TA * T S.
  • T S is a 1 / 30.72 microseconds (us).
  • TDD Time Division Duplex
  • TA is (N TA +624) * T S.
  • Offset of 624 * T S is for allowing the switch to DL transmission from UL reception at the base station.
  • N TA can be said to be information indicating the TA.
  • T A 0 to 63
  • FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the FDD case.
  • transmission / reception timings of a base station and a terminal device in the FDD case are shown.
  • the DL transmission timing and the UL reception timing are synchronized.
  • the DL frame timing and the UL frame timing are synchronized.
  • the DL reception timing in the terminal device is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station.
  • the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA91 than the DL reception timing in the terminal device.
  • FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the TDD case.
  • transmission / reception timings of the base station and the terminal device in the TDD case are shown.
  • the DL reception timing in the terminal apparatus is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal apparatus is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station.
  • the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA93 than the DL reception timing 95 in the terminal device.
  • the terminal device it takes time 99 to switch from DL reception to UL transmission.
  • the terminal device can use up to five component carriers (CC) simultaneously by carrier aggregation.
  • the terminal apparatus adjusts the UL transmission timing for PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) / PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) / SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) of the primary cell based on the DL reception timing and the information indicating TA. To do.
  • a terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing about PUSCH / SRS of a secondary cell based on DL reception timing and information indicating TA.
  • a common TA is used for the plurality of CCs.
  • the plurality of CCs belong to the same timing advance group (TAG), and the TA is a TA of this TAG.
  • the terminal device manages TAs of a plurality of TAGs.
  • the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing for a CC belonging to a certain TAG based on the TA of the certain TAG.
  • the TA command MAC (Medium Access Control) control element includes a 2-bit TAG ID and a 6-bit TA command.
  • FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK in FDD-LTE.
  • a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown.
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 4.
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 5.
  • FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
  • configurations 0 to 6 are shown as UL / DL configurations of TDD.
  • the number and arrangement of UL subframes and DL subframes differ depending on the configuration.
  • Configurations 0 to 6 are the same as those shown in Table 4.2.2 included in 3GPP TS 36.211.
  • FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of the system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the system 1 includes a base station 100 and a terminal device 200.
  • Base station 100 is a base station of a mobile communication system (or cellular system).
  • the mobile communication system is a system that complies with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard equivalent thereto.
  • the base station 100 supports FDD and performs radio communication with a terminal device (located in the cell 101) using the DL band and UL band of the FDD.
  • the UL band is a UL component carrier (CC)
  • the DL band is a DL CC.
  • the base station 100 determines whether the UL band is between the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. Switch the operation mode.
  • the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band and receives a UL signal from the terminal device in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band, and further transmits the DL signal to the terminal device in a DL subframe in the UL band.
  • DL signal is transmitted.
  • the base station 100 receives the UL signal from the terminal device in the UL subframe in the UL band.
  • Terminal device 200 is a terminal device that can communicate in the mobile communication system (or cellular system).
  • the base station 100 supports the second mode.
  • the terminal device 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band and transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band. To do.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band, and further, in the UL band, the base station 100 in a DL subframe.
  • the DL signal from is received.
  • the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band in the UL subframe.
  • the base station 100 is a macro cell base station. That is, the cell 101 is a macro cell.
  • the cell 101 is a macro cell.
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a macro cell base station.
  • a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown.
  • the base station 100 is a macro cell base station
  • the cell 101 is a macro cell overlapping the small cell 21.
  • the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 20 of the small cell 21.
  • the base station 100 may be a small cell base station. That is, the cell 101 may be a small cell.
  • the cell 101 may be a small cell.
  • FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a small cell base station.
  • a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown.
  • the base station 100 is a small cell base station
  • the cell 101 is a small cell overlapping the macro cell 31.
  • the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 30 of the macro cell 31.
  • FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the base station 100 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the base station 100 includes an antenna unit 110, a wireless communication unit 120, a network communication unit 130, a storage unit 140, and a processing unit 150.
  • Antenna unit 110 The antenna unit 110 radiates a signal output from the wireless communication unit 120 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 110 converts radio waves in space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 120.
  • the wireless communication unit 120 transmits and receives signals.
  • the radio communication unit 120 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device and receives a UL signal from the terminal device.
  • the network communication unit 130 transmits and receives information.
  • the network communication unit 130 transmits information to other nodes and receives information from other nodes.
  • the other nodes include other base stations and core network nodes.
  • Storage unit 140 The storage unit 140 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the base station 100 and various data.
  • Processing unit 150 provides various functions of the base station 100.
  • the processing unit 150 includes a switching unit 151 and a control unit 153.
  • the processing unit 150 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 150 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.
  • the switching unit 151 and the control unit 153 will be described in detail later.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the terminal device 200 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • the terminal device 200 includes an antenna unit 210, a wireless communication unit 220, a storage unit 230, and a processing unit 240.
  • Antenna unit 210 The antenna unit 210 radiates the signal output from the wireless communication unit 220 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 210 converts a radio wave in the space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 220.
  • the wireless communication unit 220 transmits and receives signals.
  • the radio communication unit 220 receives a DL signal from the base station and transmits a UL signal to the base station.
  • an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 of the terminal device 200 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure.
  • an FDD-DL reception circuit 221, an FDD-UL transmission circuit 223, and a TDD-DL reception circuit 225 included in the wireless communication unit 220 are illustrated.
  • an antenna 211 included in the antenna unit 210 is also shown.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL
  • the FDD-DL reception circuit 221 and the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 are used.
  • the operation mode is the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division
  • a TDD-DL reception circuit 225 is used. More specifically, the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 and the TDD-DL reception circuit 225 are used in a time division manner.
  • Storage unit 230 The storage unit 230 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the terminal device 200 and various data.
  • the processing unit 240 provides various functions of the terminal device 200.
  • the processing unit 240 includes an information acquisition unit 241 and a control unit 243.
  • the processing unit 240 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 240 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.
  • the information acquisition unit 241 and the control unit 243 will be described in detail later.
  • the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
  • the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed.
  • the DL transmission timing for the FDD DL band may be different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized.
  • a specific example of the DL transmission timing delay caused by switching will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a delay in DL transmission timing caused by switching between UL and DL in the UL band.
  • the transmission / reception timing in the base station in the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the transmission / reception timing in the base station is shown.
  • DL transmission timing and UL reception timing are synchronized in the base station.
  • the DL transmission timing for the UL band in the base station is higher than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Also late.
  • the DL reception timing for the UL band can be sent more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the DL band is different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized.
  • the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
  • (A) Switching trigger For example, if DL traffic in the cell 101 is sufficiently larger than UL traffic and the number of terminal devices supporting the second mode is sufficient, the base station 100 (switching The unit 151) switches the operation mode for the UL band from the first mode to the second mode.
  • (B) UL transmission timing before and after switching For example, the base station 100 does not change the UL transmission timing (in other words, UL frame timing) before and after switching the operation mode for the UL band. Thereby, for example, it is possible to further reduce the influence on a terminal device that does not support the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “legacy terminal”).
  • legacy terminal a terminal device that does not support the second mode
  • the DL transmission timing for the UL band is later than the DL transmission timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band by the delay caused by the switching of the operation mode. Become. This point is as described with reference to FIG.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the switching of the operation mode between the first mode and the second mode (hereinafter, “mode switching information”). To the terminal device 200.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information in the system information (System Information).
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
  • the individual signaling may be RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling.
  • the terminal device 200 (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the mode switching information.
  • the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and performs DL reception and UL in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. Send.
  • the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and when the operation mode is the second mode, Processing for DL reception and UL transmission in the UL band is performed.
  • the base station 100 determines the first timing advance (TA) based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
  • TA timing advance
  • An instruction and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band are given.
  • the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA are instructions to the same terminal device 200 that supports the second mode.
  • the terminal device 200 determines the UL reception based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA.
  • the UL transmission timing for the band is adjusted.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
  • the second TA is longer than the first TA.
  • specific examples of the first TA and the second TA will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining examples of the first TA and the second TA.
  • transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown. Since the base station 100 requires time 41 for switching from UL to DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed from the DL transmission timing for the DL band. As a result, the terminal apparatus 200 can send the DL reception timing for the UL band more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the base station 100 (control unit 153) instructs the first TA 43 based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the second TA 45 based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the second TA45 is longer than the first TA43.
  • the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and information indicating the first TA 43. Or the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing in the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said UL band, and the information which shows 2nd TA45.
  • the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA, and the TA command for the second TA. Based on the above, information indicating the second TA is generated.
  • base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA to the terminal apparatus 200. Furthermore, the base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A2 for adjusting the second TA to the terminal apparatus 200.
  • the terminal device 200 calculates N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and NTAl .
  • the terminal device 200 the T A2, to calculate the N TA2 for the second TA. That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and NTA2 .
  • the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL. Also, by adjusting the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing in the UL band, not the DL reception timing in the DL band, which has a delay dispersion different from that of the UL band, it is possible to achieve higher accuracy. Timing adjustment is possible.
  • the TA command for the first TA is a command for the first TAG
  • the TA command for the second TA is different from the first TAG. This is a command for TAG.
  • the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the first TA and a TAG ID of the first TAG to the terminal device 200. Further, the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the second TA and a TAG ID of the second TAG to the terminal device 200.
  • the terminal device 200 can distinguish between the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.
  • (C-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives an instruction for one of the first TA and the second TA in response to the notification of the TA command, and the first TA Even if an instruction is given for the other of the first TA and the second TA by notification of information indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (hereinafter referred to as “offset information”) Good.
  • the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the one of the first TA and the second TA based on the TA command, and based on the information and the offset information Information indicating the other of the first TA and the second TA may be generated.
  • One of the first TA and the second TA is the first TA, and the other of the first TA and the second TA is the second TA. Also good.
  • the base station 100 is a TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA may notify the terminal device 200.
  • the terminal device 200 may calculate N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is information (offset information) indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (for example, in system information or by signaling).
  • a certain NTA_offset may be notified to the terminal device 200.
  • the terminal device 200 may calculate N TA2 (for example, N TA1 + N TA_offset ) from N TA1 and N TA_offset . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA.
  • NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).
  • the terminal apparatus 200 uses the first TA when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated as an initial value from the information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ). Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA2 ) indicating the second TA based on the second TA command.
  • the terminal device 200 continuously obtains the second information from the information indicating the first TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ).
  • the information indicating TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated.
  • the base station 100 may notify the offset information in the system information.
  • the base station 100 may notify the offset information by signaling.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode. Notification may be performed. That is, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode, and the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the operation for the second TA when the operation mode is the first mode.
  • the above instructions may be given.
  • the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.
  • the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal apparatus 200 in the DL band.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
  • the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL region.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
  • (D-2) ACK / NACK For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the first TA indicating the first TA.
  • the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
  • the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) transmits the ACK / NACK for the DL data transmitted in the UL band, and the DL reception timing for the UL band and the second TA The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.
  • the base station 100 determines that the UL / DL is used when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode. Wireless communication in the UL band is performed according to the configuration.
  • the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.
  • the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
  • the base station 100 determines the UL / DL configuration when the operation mode is switched from the first mode to the second mode. And the UL / DL configuration is applied to the UL band.
  • the base station 100 selects a UL / DL configuration having an appropriate ratio of DL subframes and UL subframes based on DL traffic and UL traffic in the cell 101.
  • (A-3) UL / DL configuration change When the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. You may change in UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band in the same manner as in a fifth embodiment to be described later.
  • (A-4) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as “configuration information”) to the terminal. Notify device 200.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information.
  • the configuration information may be included in the system information as new information.
  • the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
  • Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency domain
  • the base station 100 broadcasts a PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) configuration index and a PRACH frequency offset in the SIB (System Information Block) 2 .
  • the terminal device 200 can know a radio resource (random access time frequency region) in which transmission of a random access preamble is permitted.
  • only one random access time frequency region is arranged per subframe. It can be known from the PRACH configuration index in which subframe in the radio frame the random access time frequency region is arranged. It can be known from the PRACH frequency offset to which resource block the random access time frequency region is arranged.
  • the base station 100 arranges a random access time frequency region in the UL subframe.
  • (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
  • the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.
  • (C) Transmission of synchronization signal For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 transmits a synchronization signal in the UL band.
  • the control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs processing for transmitting the synchronization signal in the UL band. Specifically, for example, the control unit 243 performs generation of the synchronization signal and / or mapping of the synchronization signal to a radio resource.
  • the terminal device 200 can synchronize more accurately in the UL band.
  • the synchronization signal is a signal corresponding to the cell ID, similarly to the synchronization signal transmitted in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the synchronization signals are PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal).
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • (C-2) Transmission in a predetermined subframe For example, in the second mode, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division, and at least in a predetermined subframe of radio frames. In this mode, the UL band is used for DL. Then, the control unit 243 of the base station 100 transmits the synchronization signal in the predetermined subframe in the radio frame.
  • control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs synchronization in the UL band so that a synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of the radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Performs processing for signal transmission.
  • the predetermined subframes are subframes having subframe numbers 1 and 6 (PSS subframes) and subframes having subframe numbers 0 and 5 (SSS). Subframe).
  • the predetermined subframe may be a subframe (subframe for PSS and SSS) having subframe numbers 0 and 5.
  • the synchronization signal is reliably transmitted in the UL band, and the terminal device 200 can be more reliably synchronized in the UL band.
  • Terminal Device 200 (control unit 243) performs synchronization in the UL band based on the synchronization signal.
  • (D) Scheduling For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio resource allocation (that is, scheduling).
  • (D-1) Legacy terminal-DL resource allocation
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL band as a DL resource to a legacy terminal (ie, a terminal device that does not support the second mode). Allocate radio resources.
  • the base station 100 determines that the intra-frame is within 4 frames before the UL subframe of the UL band.
  • the DL band radio resources are allocated to legacy terminals. Thereby, for example, the legacy terminal can transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the radio resource in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the legacy terminal of scheduling information (that is, information indicating radio resource allocation) in the DL band. More specifically, for example, in the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) of the DL band, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel) of the DL band and the PUSCH (Physical) of the UL band. The legacy terminal is notified of scheduling information on the uplink shared channel.
  • scheduling information that is, information indicating radio resource allocation
  • Terminal device 200 -Allocation of DL resource For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits, to the terminal device 200 (that is, a terminal device that supports the second mode), a DL resource as the DL resource, UL band radio resources (radio resources in the DL subframe) are allocated.
  • the terminal device 200 may perform measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band, and report the measurement result to the base station 100. If the measurement result is good (for example, if the received power is sufficiently large), the base station 100 (the control unit 153) uses the UL band radio resource (the radio resource in the DL subframe) as the terminal device. 200 may be assigned.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the PDSCH of the DL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.
  • the base station 100 when the operation mode is the second mode, notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL resource in the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information for the PDSCH in the UL band in the PDCCH in the DL band. That is, cross carrier scheduling is performed.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the DL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PDSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.
  • the base station 100 when the operation mode is the second mode, notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the UL resource of the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH of the UL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the UL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.
  • the terminal device 200 notifies the base station 100 of capability information indicating whether or not flexible duplex is possible.
  • the capability information indicates whether flexible duplex is possible for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200. Thereby, for example, the base station 100 can know that the terminal device 200 supports the second mode.
  • the capability information may further indicate whether or not DL carrier aggregation and UL carrier aggregation are possible (for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200).
  • FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the first mode according to the first embodiment.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S301).
  • the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band.
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S303). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S305). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S321).
  • the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
  • the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S323).
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S325).
  • the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S327).
  • the second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S333). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S335). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the first embodiment has been described above. According to the first embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
  • the base station 100 instructs the first TA to be based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and the UL band. For the second TA with reference to the DL reception timing for.
  • the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) transmits the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA. Based on the above, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division.
  • (A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.
  • the second TA is longer than the first TA.
  • (C) Instruction Method For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA by notification of a timing advance (TA) command. .
  • TA timing advance
  • the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.
  • the legacy terminal generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA.
  • the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the second TA based on the TA command for the second TA.
  • the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command. In particular, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA.
  • the base station 100 transmits a TA command for the first TA (TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal device. 200 is notified.
  • the “first TA” here simply means a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and does not mean a TA for a specific terminal (for example, the legacy terminal). That is, the “first TA” for the terminal device 200 and the “first TA” for the legacy terminal are different TAs.
  • FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the second embodiment.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S341).
  • the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode.
  • the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
  • the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S343).
  • the base station 100 notifies the legacy terminal of the TA command for the first TA (S345).
  • the first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S347).
  • the second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S349). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S351). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S353). Then, the legacy terminal performs UL transmission in the UL band (S355). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the second embodiment has been described above. According to the second embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 is not based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, but based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Then, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
  • the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
  • (A) Trigger for switching The description of the trigger for switching the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
  • the base station 100 determines the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band.
  • the DL transmission timing is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the UL band.
  • FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of DL transmission timing for the DL band and the UL band.
  • transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown.
  • the base station 100 requires time 51 to switch from UL to DL in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 considers the time 51 and synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the UL band with the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
  • the terminal device 200 for example, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the DL reception timing for the UL band are synchronized. Therefore, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing (DL reception timing for the DL band or DL reception timing for the UL band) and the TA 53.
  • the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner.
  • synchronizing timing may not mean “synchronizing the timing so that there is no difference between timings”. It may mean that the timing is synchronized so that it falls within a predetermined range.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band is the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
  • the predetermined time is a time required for switching from UL to DL in the UL band.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band is the time 51 (that is, the time required for switching from the UL to the DL in the UL band) rather than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Only early.
  • the terminal device 200 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. It becomes possible to make it.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band is the same as that for the DL band.
  • the predetermined time may be earlier than the DL transmission timing. That is, even if the operation mode is switched, the base station 100 does not have to change the UL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band is: It synchronizes with the DL transmission timing for the DL band.
  • the operation mode is the second mode
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band is earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
  • the base station 100 may increase the TA for UL transmission in the UL band by the predetermined time in accordance with the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. And instructing the TA.
  • This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band can be advanced by a predetermined time in accordance with the switching. As a result, for example, collision between the UL subframe and the DL subframe is avoided.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by the notification of the TA command in the subframe six subframes before the switching.
  • the TA command indicates a value (T A ) that makes the TA for UL transmission in the UL band longer by the predetermined time. Thereby, for example, the TA can be lengthened by the predetermined time at the switching timing.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information (for example, N TA ) indicating the UL transmission TA in the UL band based on the TA command.
  • information for example, N TA
  • the base station 100 determines that the TA for UL transmission in the UL band is the predetermined time.
  • An instruction for the TA is given to shorten the time.
  • the base station 100 gives the instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
  • offset information The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notification of information indicating the offset corresponding to the predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as “offset information”). May be.
  • the terminal device 200 may generate information indicating the TA of UL transmission in the UL band (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the offset information NTA_offset (for example, in the system information or by signaling).
  • Terminal device 200, and an N TA and N TA_offset may calculate a new N TA. That is, the terminal device 200 may newly generate NTA that is information indicating the TA.
  • NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).
  • the terminal device 200 generates the information indicating the TA (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode. May be. Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA ) indicating the TA based on the TA command.
  • the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA ) indicating the TA based on the TA command.
  • the base station 100 may notify the offset information in the system information.
  • the base station 100 may notify the offset information by individual signaling.
  • the individual signaling may be RRC signaling.
  • the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.
  • the UL reception timing for the UL band depends on whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Instead, it may be earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.
  • the base station 100 may instruct the UL transmission TA in the UL band as usual, regardless of whether or not the operation mode is switched.
  • the base station 100 may instruct the TA as usual by notifying the TA command.
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing and the TA for UL transmission in the UL band.
  • the DL reception timing is a DL reception timing for the DL band.
  • the DL reception timing may be a DL reception timing for the DL band or a DL reception timing for the UL band. .
  • (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
  • the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
  • (C) Synchronization signal For example, even if the operation mode is the second mode, a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the UL band. That is, the base station 100 does not transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band even when the operation mode is the second mode. This is because the DL transmission timing for the UL band is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Thereby, for example, radio resources are saved.
  • the base station 100 may transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing according to the third embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA (S361).
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band and the information indicating the TA (S363). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S365). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S367).
  • the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
  • the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA before the switching of the operation mode (S369). For example, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
  • the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S371). Further, the base station 100 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band (S373).
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band or the UL band and the information indicating the TA (S375). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S377). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the third embodiment has been described above. According to the third embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
  • the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
  • the base station 100 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
  • the TA is instructed based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band.
  • This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200. Note that the base station 100 (the control unit 153) does not give an instruction about TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
  • the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the DL reception timing.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the above instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command for the TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band.
  • the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the TA command.
  • the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing about the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said DL band, and the information which shows said TA.
  • the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates the information indicating the TA based on the TA command.
  • the base station 100 sends a TA command for TA43 (TA based on DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal apparatus 200 regardless of the operation mode for the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA 43, regardless of the operation mode for the UL band. .
  • (B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.
  • the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.
  • FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fourth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD (S381).
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band of the FDD based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S383). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S385). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S387).
  • the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL
  • the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S389).
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band (S391).
  • the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S393). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S395). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.
  • the fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fourth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the terminal device 200 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode.
  • the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band.
  • the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.
  • the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in four subframes of the certain subframe in the FDD UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe after the frame.
  • a subframe after four subframes of the certain subframe may be a DL subframe. Therefore, the terminal device may not be able to transmit the ACK / NACK for the DL data.
  • the subframe in which DL data is transmitted in the DL band may be limited to a subframe that is four subframes before the UL subframe.
  • FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example in which a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted is a DL subframe.
  • an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
  • the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number of 4 in the UL band.
  • Sent in subframe
  • the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 4 is a DL subframe.
  • NACK cannot be transmitted.
  • the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 0.
  • an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number in the UL band. 5 is transmitted in a subframe.
  • the terminal apparatus since the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 5 is a DL subframe, the terminal apparatus transmits an ACK for the DL data. / NACK cannot be transmitted.
  • the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 1.
  • the base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.
  • the description of the operation mode switching in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the operation mode switching in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
  • (2) UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio transmission in the UL band according to the UL / DL configuration. Communicate.
  • the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.
  • the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.
  • (C) Change of UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. Change in UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) may dynamically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, and semi-statically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band. (Semi-statically)
  • the multiple UL / DL configuration candidates are a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD. More specifically, for example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. As an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
  • the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates may be a plurality of different configurations (for example, a plurality of configurations unique to FDD) instead of a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD.
  • the base station 100 changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band based on the DL traffic and the UL traffic in the cell 101. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a UL / DL configuration having a more appropriate ratio of DL subframes to UL subframes. Change to
  • the amount of DL resources and the amount of UL resources can be adjusted more flexibly.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as “configuration information”) to the terminal device 200.
  • configuration information information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information.
  • the configuration information may be included in the system information as new information.
  • the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.
  • the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) has the above operation mode
  • the terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data (hereinafter referred to as “DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information”).
  • the terminal device acquires the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Furthermore, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. When the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.
  • the DL data includes DL data transmitted in the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK is transmitted for DL data transmitted in the DL band.
  • the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the DL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.
  • the DL data further includes DL data transmitted in the UL band.
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.
  • the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is a UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL sub Can be sent in frames.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is for the first UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data.
  • the first UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a DL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • subframes subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data
  • DL reference UL / DL configuration an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data) defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of subframes defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • This table is the same as Table 10.1.3A-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • subframes with subframe numbers 2 and 3 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data. More specifically, in a subframe having a subframe number of 2, it was transmitted in a subframe that is 7 to 12 subframes before the subframe (that is, a subframe having a subframe number of 0 to 5).
  • ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted. Further, in the subframe having the subframe number 3, the DL data transmitted in the subframe 4 to 7 subframes before the subframe (that is, the subframe having the subframe number 6 to 9) is transmitted. ACK / NACK is transmitted.
  • the first UL / DL configuration candidate is a UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of UL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
  • the first UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 4 shown in FIG.
  • subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data are subframes having subframe numbers 2 and 3, as shown in FIG.
  • FIGS. 21 and 22 an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.
  • FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band.
  • a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4.
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data has a subframe number in the UL band. 2 is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe).
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band in the subband. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.
  • FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.
  • an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 0, 1, 4, or 5 in the UL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose subframe number is 2.
  • ACK / NACK for the DL data is subframed in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is not limited to this example.
  • the subframe may be an arbitrary UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band. Send in.
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the first UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as “DL reference UL / DL”). Called configuration information).
  • the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the DL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information.
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information by individual signaling.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling when the state of the terminal device 200 transitions from the idle state to the connected state.
  • the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information.
  • the system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits ACK / NACK for UL data when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to the subframe to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as “UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information”).
  • the terminal device acquires the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
  • the terminal device 200 receives ACK / NACK for UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information.
  • the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for receiving ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.
  • the UL band when used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately receive ACK / NACK for UL data.
  • the uplink data is UL data transmitted in the UL band.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
  • the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data to the DL sub Can be received in frames.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is for a second UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data.
  • the second UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a UL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of subframes defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG.
  • a subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • This table is the same as Table 9.1.2-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213.
  • an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 4 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 6).
  • an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 7 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 0).
  • subframes with subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data.
  • the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of DL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
  • the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.
  • the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 0 shown in FIG.
  • subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data are subframes having subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6, as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 1 an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data will be described with reference to FIG.
  • FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data transmitted in the UL band.
  • an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown.
  • the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4.
  • an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe having a subframe number of 6 in the UL band. (DL subframe).
  • ACK / NACK for the UL data has a subframe number of 0 in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (DL subframe).
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is not limited to this example.
  • the subframe may be any DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band, to the UL band. Send in.
  • the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the second UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as “UL reference UL / DL”). Called configuration information).
  • the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.
  • the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the UL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information.
  • the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information by individual signaling.
  • the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling.
  • the individual signaling is RRC signaling.
  • the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information.
  • the system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.
  • the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.
  • the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe.
  • the terminal device 200 controls the measurement for the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
  • the terminal device 200 performs measurement on the UL band based on a reference signal transmitted in the UL band in the subframe (transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data).
  • the reference signal is CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal)
  • the measurement is RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) and / or RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality).
  • the terminal device 200 can perform measurement on a subframe (that is, DL subframe) in which the reference signal is reliably transmitted.
  • a subframe that is, DL subframe
  • measurement errors are avoided.
  • (C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.
  • FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fifth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal apparatus 200 of DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S401).
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information on a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band of FDD is the second mode.
  • the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a DL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S403).
  • the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode.
  • the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a UL reference UL / DL configuration.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S405).
  • the mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode.
  • the first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S407).
  • the base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S409).
  • the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S411). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S413).
  • the terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S415). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S417). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
  • the base station 100 changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S419).
  • the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S421). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S423).
  • the terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S425). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S427). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
  • the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the changed UL / DL configuration at any timing.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 may be notified of the changed UL / DL configuration before transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427), and changed after transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427).
  • the UL / DL configuration may be notified.
  • the terminal apparatus 200 can transmit ACK / NACK for the DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S423), and the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.
  • the ACK / NACK for the UL data can be received based on (S427).
  • the fourth embodiment has been described above.
  • wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.
  • ACK / NACK for UL data is appropriately transmitted.
  • any one of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with the fifth embodiment.
  • the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in any of the first to fourth embodiments performs the operation of the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in the fifth embodiment.
  • the terminal device 200 (especially the control unit 243) in any of the first to fourth embodiments may perform the operation of the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) in the fifth embodiment.
  • the base station 100 may be realized as any type of eNB (evolved Node B) such as a macro eNB or a small eNB.
  • the small eNB may be an eNB that covers a cell smaller than a macro cell, such as a pico eNB, a micro eNB, or a home (femto) eNB.
  • the base station 100 may be realized as another type of base station such as a NodeB or a BTS (Base Transceiver Station).
  • Base station 100 may include a main body (also referred to as a base station apparatus) that controls radio communication, and one or more RRHs (Remote Radio Heads) that are arranged at locations different from the main body. Further, various types of terminals described later may operate as the base station 100 by temporarily or semi-permanently executing the base station function. Furthermore, at least some components of the base station 100 may be realized in a base station apparatus or a module for the base station apparatus.
  • RRHs Remote Radio Heads
  • the terminal device 200 is a smartphone, a tablet PC (Personal Computer), a notebook PC, a portable game terminal, a mobile terminal such as a portable / dongle type mobile router or a digital camera, or an in-vehicle terminal such as a car navigation device. It may be realized as.
  • the terminal device 200 may be realized as a terminal (also referred to as an MTC (Machine Type Communication) terminal) that performs M2M (Machine To Machine) communication.
  • MTC Machine Type Communication
  • M2M Machine To Machine
  • at least a part of the components of the terminal device 200 may be realized in a module (for example, an integrated circuit module configured by one die) mounted on these terminals.
  • FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a first example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied.
  • the eNB 800 includes one or more antennas 810 and a base station device 820. Each antenna 810 and the base station apparatus 820 can be connected to each other via an RF cable.
  • Each of the antennas 810 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission and reception of radio signals by the base station apparatus 820.
  • the eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of antennas 810 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example. 26 shows an example in which the eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810, but the eNB 800 may include a single antenna 810.
  • the base station apparatus 820 includes a controller 821, a memory 822, a network interface 823, and a wireless communication interface 825.
  • the controller 821 may be a CPU or a DSP, for example, and operates various functions of the upper layer of the base station apparatus 820. For example, the controller 821 generates a data packet from the data in the signal processed by the wireless communication interface 825, and transfers the generated packet via the network interface 823. The controller 821 may generate a bundled packet by bundling data from a plurality of baseband processors, and may transfer the generated bundled packet. In addition, the controller 821 is a logic that executes control such as radio resource control, radio bearer control, mobility management, inflow control, or scheduling. May have a typical function. Moreover, the said control may be performed in cooperation with a surrounding eNB or a core network node.
  • the memory 822 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs executed by the controller 821 and various control data (for example, terminal list, transmission power data, scheduling data, and the like).
  • the network interface 823 is a communication interface for connecting the base station device 820 to the core network 824.
  • the controller 821 may communicate with the core network node or other eNB via the network interface 823.
  • the eNB 800 and the core network node or another eNB may be connected to each other by a logical interface (for example, an S1 interface or an X2 interface).
  • the network interface 823 may be a wired communication interface or a wireless communication interface for wireless backhaul.
  • the network interface 823 may use a frequency band higher than the frequency band used by the wireless communication interface 825 for wireless communication.
  • the wireless communication interface 825 supports any cellular communication scheme such as LTE (Long Term Evolution) or LTE-Advanced, and provides a wireless connection to terminals located in the cell of the eNB 800 via the antenna 810.
  • the wireless communication interface 825 may typically include a baseband (BB) processor 826, an RF circuit 827, and the like.
  • the BB processor 826 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and each layer (for example, L1, MAC (Medium Access Control), RLC (Radio Link Control), and PDCP).
  • Various signal processing of Packet Data Convergence Protocol
  • Packet Data Convergence Protocol is executed.
  • the BB processor 826 may have some or all of the logical functions described above instead of the controller 821.
  • the BB processor 826 may be a module that includes a memory that stores a communication control program, a processor that executes the program, and related circuits. The function of the BB processor 826 may be changed by updating the program. Good.
  • the module may be a card or a blade inserted into a slot of the base station apparatus 820, or a chip mounted on the card or the blade.
  • the RF circuit 827 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 810.
  • the radio communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of BB processors 826 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example.
  • the wireless communication interface 825 may include a plurality of RF circuits 827 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of RF circuits 827 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements.
  • 26 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 and a plurality of RF circuits 827, the wireless communication interface 825 includes a single BB processor 826 or a single RF circuit 827. But you can.
  • the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 825. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 821.
  • the eNB 800 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 826) or all of the wireless communication interface 825 and / or the controller 821, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be.
  • the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153).
  • a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 800, and the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the BB processor 826) and / or the controller 821 executes the program.
  • the eNB 800, the base station device 820, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153.
  • a program may be provided.
  • a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
  • the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the RF circuit 827). Further, the antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 810.
  • the network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 821 and / or the network interface 823.
  • FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied.
  • the eNB 830 includes one or more antennas 840, a base station apparatus 850, and an RRH 860. Each antenna 840 and RRH 860 may be connected to each other via an RF cable. Base station apparatus 850 and RRH 860 can be connected to each other via a high-speed line such as an optical fiber cable.
  • Each of the antennas 840 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of radio signals by the RRH 860.
  • the eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of antennas 840 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example.
  • 27 illustrates an example in which the eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840, but the eNB 830 may include a single antenna 840.
  • the base station device 850 includes a controller 851, a memory 852, a network interface 853, a wireless communication interface 855, and a connection interface 857.
  • the controller 851, the memory 852, and the network interface 853 are the same as the controller 821, the memory 822, and the network interface 823 described with reference to FIG.
  • the plurality of BB processors 856 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example.
  • 27 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 855 includes a plurality of BB processors 856, the wireless communication interface 855 may include a single BB processor 856.
  • connection interface 857 is an interface for connecting the base station device 850 (wireless communication interface 855) to the RRH 860.
  • the connection interface 857 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line that connects the base station apparatus 850 (wireless communication interface 855) and the RRH 860.
  • the RRH 860 includes a connection interface 861 and a wireless communication interface 863.
  • connection interface 861 is an interface for connecting the RRH 860 (wireless communication interface 863) to the base station device 850.
  • the connection interface 861 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line.
  • the wireless communication interface 863 transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840.
  • the wireless communication interface 863 may typically include an RF circuit 864 and the like.
  • the RF circuit 864 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840.
  • the wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of RF circuits 864 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements, respectively.
  • 27 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864, the wireless communication interface 863 may include a single RF circuit 864.
  • the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the wireless communication interface 863. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 851. As an example, the eNB 830 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 856) or all of the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the controller 851, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be.
  • the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153).
  • a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 830, and the radio communication interface 855 (for example, the BB processor 856) and / or the controller 851 executes the program. May be.
  • the eNB 830, the base station device 850, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153.
  • a program may be provided.
  • a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
  • the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 863 (for example, the RF circuit 864).
  • the antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 840.
  • the network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 851 and / or the network interface 853.
  • FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone 900 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the smartphone 900 includes a processor 901, a memory 902, a storage 903, an external connection interface 904, a camera 906, a sensor 907, a microphone 908, an input device 909, a display device 910, a speaker 911, a wireless communication interface 912, one or more antenna switches 915.
  • One or more antennas 916, a bus 917, a battery 918 and an auxiliary controller 919 are provided.
  • the processor 901 may be, for example, a CPU or a SoC (System on Chip), and controls the functions of the application layer and other layers of the smartphone 900.
  • the memory 902 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores programs executed by the processor 901 and data.
  • the storage 903 can include a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory or a hard disk.
  • the external connection interface 904 is an interface for connecting an external device such as a memory card or a USB (Universal Serial Bus) device to the smartphone 900.
  • the camera 906 includes, for example, an image sensor such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), and generates a captured image.
  • the sensor 907 may include a sensor group such as a positioning sensor, a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an acceleration sensor.
  • the microphone 908 converts sound input to the smartphone 900 into an audio signal.
  • the input device 909 includes, for example, a touch sensor that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 910, a keypad, a keyboard, a button, or a switch, and receives an operation or information input from a user.
  • the display device 910 has a screen such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, and displays an output image of the smartphone 900.
  • the speaker 911 converts an audio signal output from the smartphone 900 into audio.
  • the wireless communication interface 912 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
  • the wireless communication interface 912 may typically include a BB processor 913, an RF circuit 914, and the like.
  • the BB processor 913 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication.
  • the RF circuit 914 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives radio signals via the antenna 916.
  • the wireless communication interface 912 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 913 and the RF circuit 914 are integrated.
  • the wireless communication interface 912 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) method in addition to the cellular communication method.
  • a BB processor 913 and an RF circuit 914 for each wireless communication method may be included.
  • Each of the antenna switches 915 switches the connection destination of the antenna 916 among a plurality of circuits (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems) included in the wireless communication interface 912.
  • Each of the antennas 916 includes a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 912.
  • the smartphone 900 may include a plurality of antennas 916 as illustrated in FIG. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates an example in which the smartphone 900 includes a plurality of antennas 916, but the smartphone 900 may include a single antenna 916.
  • the smartphone 900 may include an antenna 916 for each wireless communication method.
  • the antenna switch 915 may be omitted from the configuration of the smartphone 900.
  • the bus 917 connects the processor 901, memory 902, storage 903, external connection interface 904, camera 906, sensor 907, microphone 908, input device 909, display device 910, speaker 911, wireless communication interface 912, and auxiliary controller 919 to each other.
  • the battery 918 supplies electric power to each block of the smartphone 900 shown in FIG. 28 through a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing.
  • the auxiliary controller 919 operates the minimum necessary functions of the smartphone 900 in the sleep mode.
  • the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912.
  • the smartphone 900 illustrated in FIG. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the processor 901 or the auxiliary controller 919.
  • the smartphone 900 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 913) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 912, the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller 919, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the module is included in the module.
  • the control unit 243 may be mounted.
  • the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243).
  • the program may be executed.
  • a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the smartphone 900, and the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the BB processor 913), the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller is installed. 919 may execute the program.
  • the smartphone 900 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is provided. May be provided.
  • a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
  • the wireless communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the RF circuit 914).
  • the antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 916.
  • FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation device 920 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied.
  • the car navigation device 920 includes a processor 921, a memory 922, a GPS (Global Positioning System) module 924, a sensor 925, a data interface 926, a content player 927, a storage medium interface 928, an input device 929, a display device 930, a speaker 931, and wireless communication.
  • the interface 933 includes one or more antenna switches 936, one or more antennas 937, and a battery 938.
  • the processor 921 may be a CPU or SoC, for example, and controls the navigation function and other functions of the car navigation device 920.
  • the memory 922 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs and data executed by the processor 921.
  • the GPS module 924 measures the position (for example, latitude, longitude, and altitude) of the car navigation device 920 using GPS signals received from GPS satellites.
  • the sensor 925 may include a sensor group such as a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an atmospheric pressure sensor.
  • the data interface 926 is connected to the in-vehicle network 941 through a terminal (not shown), for example, and acquires data generated on the vehicle side such as vehicle speed data.
  • the content player 927 reproduces content stored in a storage medium (for example, CD or DVD) inserted into the storage medium interface 928.
  • the input device 929 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a button, or a switch that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 930, and receives an operation or information input from the user.
  • the display device 930 has a screen such as an LCD or an OLED display, and displays a navigation function or an image of content to be reproduced.
  • the speaker 931 outputs the navigation function or the audio of the content to be played back.
  • the wireless communication interface 933 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication.
  • the wireless communication interface 933 may typically include a BB processor 934, an RF circuit 935, and the like.
  • the BB processor 934 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication.
  • the RF circuit 935 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 937.
  • the wireless communication interface 933 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 934 and the RF circuit 935 are integrated.
  • the wireless communication interface 933 may include a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935 as shown in FIG. 29 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 933 includes a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935, the wireless communication interface 933 includes a single BB processor 934 or a single RF circuit 935. But you can.
  • the wireless communication interface 933 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN method in addition to the cellular communication method.
  • a BB processor 934 and an RF circuit 935 may be included for each communication method.
  • Each of the antenna switches 936 switches the connection destination of the antenna 937 among a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems).
  • Each of the antennas 937 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 933.
  • the car navigation device 920 may include a plurality of antennas 937 as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 29 illustrates an example in which the car navigation apparatus 920 includes a plurality of antennas 937, but the car navigation apparatus 920 may include a single antenna 937.
  • the car navigation device 920 may include an antenna 937 for each wireless communication method.
  • the antenna switch 936 may be omitted from the configuration of the car navigation device 920.
  • the battery 938 supplies power to each block of the car navigation apparatus 920 shown in FIG. 29 via a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing. Further, the battery 938 stores electric power supplied from the vehicle side.
  • the car navigation device 920 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 934) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 933 and / or the processor 921, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 in the module. May be implemented.
  • the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243).
  • the program may be executed.
  • a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the car navigation device 920, and the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, the BB processor 934) and / or the processor 921 The program may be executed.
  • the car navigation device 920 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and the processor functions as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243.
  • a program may be provided.
  • a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.
  • the radio communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 933 (for example, the RF circuit 935).
  • the antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 937.
  • the technology according to the present disclosure may be realized as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 including one or more blocks of the car navigation device 920 described above, an in-vehicle network 941, and a vehicle side module 942. That is, the in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243.
  • the vehicle-side module 942 generates vehicle-side data such as vehicle speed, engine speed, or failure information, and outputs the generated data to the in-vehicle network 941.
  • the base station 100 uses the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for the UL and the UL band is The switching unit 151 that switches the operation mode for the UL band between the second mode used for both DL and UL by the division, and the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band And a control unit 153 that issues an instruction for the first TA as a reference and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.
  • the base station 100 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • a control unit 153 that synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the band.
  • the terminal device 200 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • Information acquisition unit 241 for acquiring information indicating the switching of the operation mode for the UL band between, and when the operation mode is the first mode, processing for UL transmission in the UL band is performed.
  • a control unit 243 that performs processing for DL reception and DL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. The control unit 243 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.
  • the UL band of the FDD when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the UL band of FDD when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station is realized.
  • the base station 100 uses the FDD UL band for the UL, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.
  • a switching unit 151 that switches an operation mode for the UL band between the second mode and a subframe that transmits ACK / NACK for DL data when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • a control unit 153 for notifying the terminal device 200 of the information regarding.
  • the UL band of the FDD when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.
  • the UL band of FDD when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.
  • the system including the base station and the terminal device is a system compliant with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard based on these has been described, the present disclosure is not limited to such an example.
  • the system may be a system that complies with other communication standards.
  • processing steps in the processing of the present specification do not necessarily have to be executed in time series according to the order described in the flowchart or the sequence diagram.
  • the processing steps in the processing may be executed in an order different from the order described as a flowchart or a sequence diagram, or may be executed in parallel.
  • a processor for example, a CPU, a DSP, or the like
  • a device of the present specification for example, a base station, a base station device, a module for a base station device, or a terminal device or a module for a terminal device
  • a computer program for functioning as a component of the device for example, a switching unit and / or a control unit, or an information acquisition unit and / or a control unit
  • the processor executes the operation of the component of the device
  • a computer program can be created.
  • a recording medium on which the computer program is recorded may be provided.
  • An apparatus for example, a base station, a base station apparatus, a module for a base station apparatus, a terminal apparatus, or a device including a memory for storing the computer program and one or more processors capable of executing the computer program
  • a module for a terminal device may also be provided.
  • a method including the operation of the components of the device for example, the switching unit and / or the control unit or the information acquisition unit and / or the control unit is also included in the technology according to the present disclosure.
  • a switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band
  • a control unit for instructing timing advance A device comprising: (2) The control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance when the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
  • the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance are instructions to the same terminal device that supports the second mode.
  • the device described in 1. (4) The apparatus according to (3), wherein the control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance in response to a notification of a timing advance command.
  • the timing advance command includes a timing advance command for the first timing advance and a timing advance command for the second timing advance.
  • the timing advance command for the first timing advance is a command for a first timing advance group;
  • the timing advance command for the second timing advance is a command for a second timing advance group different from the first timing advance group.
  • the control unit gives an instruction for one of the first timing advance and the second timing advance in response to the notification of the timing advance command, and the first timing advance and the second timing advance
  • the apparatus according to any one of (3) to (6), wherein an instruction for the other of the first timing advance and the second timing advance is given by notification of information indicating an offset between the first timing advance and the second timing advance .
  • the instruction for the first timing advance is an instruction to a first terminal device that does not support the second mode;
  • the instruction for the second timing advance is an instruction to a second terminal device that supports the second mode.
  • the apparatus according to (1) or (2).
  • the first terminal device is a terminal device that adjusts uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on downlink reception timing for the downlink band
  • the second terminal apparatus adjusts an uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the apparatus according to (8) above.
  • the control unit according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit performs a process for transmitting a synchronization signal in the uplink band.
  • the control unit transmits the synchronization signal in the uplink band so that the synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of a radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Do the processing for, The apparatus according to (10) above. (12) Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band A switching unit for switching the operation mode for When the operation mode is the second mode, a control unit that synchronizes the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band When, A device comprising: (13) The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is at least a predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when at least the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the uplink reception timing for the uplink band is synchronized with the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when the operation mode is the first mode, and the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band The control unit may increase the timing advance of uplink transmission in the uplink band by the predetermined time in response to the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. Give instructions about the The device according to (13) or (14).
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit is based on a downlink reception timing for a FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, apparatus.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance, Including methods.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance, A program that causes a processor to execute.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
  • a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , Including methods.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , A program that causes a processor to execute.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; , A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth, Including methods.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth, A program that causes a processor to execute.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
  • a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit, when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band On the basis of the information indicating the first timing advance based on the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on the downlink reception timing; apparatus.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
  • the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on A program that causes a processor to execute.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference.
  • the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The control unit indicates a downlink advance timing for the uplink band and a timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on the information, apparatus.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth; Including methods.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
  • a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
  • a switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
  • a control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
  • a device comprising: (2) The apparatus according to (1), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
  • the control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
  • the subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • the apparatus according to any one of (1) to (3).
  • the subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • Frame The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
  • the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of uplink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • the control unit notifies the terminal device of other information related to a subframe in which ACK / NACK for uplink data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode, (1) to (6) The apparatus according to any one of (1).
  • the control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
  • the subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • the subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • ACK / NACK subframe for link data The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
  • the apparatus according to (9) above.
  • the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of downlink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
  • (12) The device according to any one of (1) to (11), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information by individual signaling.
  • (13) The device according to any one of (1) to (12), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information in the system information.
  • the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode; Including methods.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band; When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission; With The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of an FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
  • the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
  • the acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
  • the control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
  • the apparatus according to any one of (16) to (18).
  • the subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
  • the control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
  • the apparatus according to (19) above.
  • (21) Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
  • the uplink band Switching the operation mode about Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
  • a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • a program that causes a processor to execute.
  • the uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
  • the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
  • a readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

[Problem] To enable better wireless communications in an FDD UL band when using the UL band for both DL and UL, using time division. [Solution] Provided is a device comprising: a switching unit that switches the operation mode of an FDD uplink band between a first mode in which the uplink band is used for uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink, by using time division; and a control unit that notifies a terminal device about information relating to subframes sending ACK/NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode.

Description

装眮apparatus

 本開瀺は、装眮に関する。 This disclosure relates to an apparatus.

 近幎、スマヌトフォンの普及により、移動䜓通信ネットワヌクにおけるトラフィックが急増しおいる。堎所及び又は時間垯によっお、ダりンリンクdownlinkのトラフィックずアップリンクuplinkのトラフィックの比率が倉動する。そのため、トラフィックに応じお、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ず、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ずを柔軟に調敎するこずにより、無線リ゜ヌスを効率的に䜿甚するこずが望たれる。 In recent years, with the spread of smartphones, traffic in mobile communication networks has increased rapidly. Depending on the location and / or time zone, the ratio of downlink (DL) traffic to uplink (UL) traffic varies. Therefore, it is desired to use radio resources efficiently by flexibly adjusting the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL according to traffic.

 Long Term Evolutionでは、耇信方匏ずしお、Frequency Division Duplex及びTime Division Duplexがサポヌトされおいる。では、トラフィックに応じお、コンフィギュレヌションを動的に倉曎するこずにより、無線フレヌムにおけるサブフレヌムずサブフレヌムずの比率を倉曎するこずができる。即ち、では、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ず、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ずを柔軟に調敎するこずができる。䞀方、では、垯域ず垯域ずが予め決たっおいるので、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ず、のための無線リ゜ヌスの量ずを柔軟に調敎するこずができない。においお、より倚くの垯域ずより少ない垯域をキャリアアグリゲヌションにより䜿甚するこずも可胜であるが、結果ずしお、垯域の無線リ゜ヌスの䜿甚率が䞋がり、無線リ゜ヌスが効率的に䜿甚されるずは蚀えない。 LTE (Long Term Evolution) supports FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) and TDD (Time Division Duplex) as duplex methods. In TDD, the UL / DL configuration ratio in a radio frame can be changed by dynamically changing the UL / DL configuration according to traffic. That is, in TDD, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL can be flexibly adjusted. On the other hand, in FDD, since the DL band and the UL band are determined in advance, the amount of radio resources for DL and the amount of radio resources for UL cannot be flexibly adjusted. In FDD, it is possible to use more DL bands and fewer UL bands by carrier aggregation, but as a result, the usage rate of radio resources in the UL band decreases and radio resources are used efficiently. I can't say that.

 そこで、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する手法が怜蚎されおいる。圓該手法は、フレキシブルデュプレクスFlexible Duplexず呌ばれ埗る。䟋えば、特蚱文献には、の垯域をモヌドで䜿甚する技術が開瀺されおいる。 Therefore, a method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner has been studied. This method can be referred to as Flexible Duplex. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a technique for using an FDD UL band in a TDD mode.

特衚号公報JP 2006-518562 A

 しかし、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合には、圓該垯域においお無線通信が良奜に行われない可胜性がある。 However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.

 そこで、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずを可胜にする仕組みが提䟛されるこずが望たしい。 Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner.

 本開瀺によれば、のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのAcknowledgementNegative Acknowledgementを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知する制埡郚ず、を備える装眮が提䟛される。 According to the present disclosure, between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. And a switching unit for switching the operation mode for the uplink band, and a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode. And a control unit that notifies the terminal device of information.

 たた、本開瀺によれば、プロセッサにより、のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知するこずず、を含む方法が提䟛される。 Further, according to the present disclosure, the processor uses a first mode in which the FDD uplink band is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. Switching the operation mode for the uplink band between the mode and the information on the subframe for transmitting the ACK / NACK for the downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, Informing the terminal device.

 たた、本開瀺によれば、のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、を備える装眮が提䟛される。䞊蚘取埗郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗し、䞊蚘制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌムに関する䞊蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行う。 Further, according to the present disclosure, a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink, and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for the uplink band between, and for the uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the first mode An apparatus is provided that includes a control unit that performs processing and performs processing for downlink reception and uplink transmission in the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode, and the control unit acquires the second operation mode when the operation mode is the second mode. In the mode, processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data is performed based on the information on the subframe.

 以䞊説明したように本開瀺によれば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。なお、䞊蚘の効果は必ずしも限定的なものではなく、䞊蚘効果ずずもに、又は䞊蚘効果に代えお、本明现曞に瀺されたいずれかの効果、又は本明现曞から把握され埗る他の効果が奏されおもよい。 As described above, according to the present disclosure, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. The above effects are not necessarily limited, and any of the effects shown in the present specification or other effects that can be grasped from the present specification are exhibited together with or in place of the above effects. May be.

のケヌスにおけるの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of TA in the case of FDD. のケヌスにおけるの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of TA in the case of TDD. におけるの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of transmission of ACK / NACK in FDD-LTE. のコンフィギュレヌションの䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of UL / DL configuration of TDD. 本開瀺の実斜圢態に係るシステムの抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺す説明図である。2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a system according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 基地局がマクロセルの基地局であるケヌスを説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a macrocell. 基地局がスモヌルセルの基地局であるケヌスを説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the case where a base station is a base station of a small cell. 同実斜圢態に係る基地局の構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the base station which concerns on the same embodiment. 同実斜圢態に係る端末装眮の構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the terminal device which concerns on the same embodiment. 同実斜圢態に係る端末装眮の無線通信郚に含たれるハヌドりェアの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the hardware contained in the radio | wireless communication part of the terminal device which concerns on the embodiment. 垯域におけるずずの切替えに起因する送信タむミングの遅延の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the delay of DL transmission timing resulting from switching with UL and DL in a UL band. 第の及び第のの䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of 1st TA and 2nd TA. 第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process in the 1st mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process in the 2nd mode which concerns on 1st Embodiment. 第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process in the 2nd mode which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. 垯域及び垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングの䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of the DL transmission timing about DL band and UL band. 第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. 第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process which concerns on 4th Embodiment. デヌタに぀いおのが送信されるサブフレヌムがサブフレヌムである䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example whose sub-frame by which ACK / NACK about DL data is transmitted is a DL sub-frame. リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the sub-frame defined for DL reference UL / DL configurations. 垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of transmission of ACK / NACK about DL data transmitted in a DL band. 垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of transmission of ACK / NACK about DL data transmitted in a UL band. リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of the sub-frame defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. 垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of transmission of ACK / NACK about UL data transmitted in a UL band. 第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。It is a sequence diagram which shows an example of the schematic flow of the process which concerns on 5th Embodiment. の抂略的な構成の第の䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the 1st example of schematic structure of eNB. の抂略的な構成の第の䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows the 2nd example of schematic structure of eNB. スマヌトフォンの抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a schematic structure of a smart phone. カヌナビゲヌション装眮の抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。It is a block diagram which shows an example of a schematic structure of a car navigation apparatus.

 以䞋に添付の図面を参照しながら、本開瀺の奜適な実斜の圢態に぀いお詳现に説明する。なお、本明现曞及び図面においお、実質的に同䞀の機胜構成を有する構成芁玠に぀いおは、同䞀の笊号を付するこずにより重耇説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present disclosure will be described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings. In addition, in this specification and drawing, about the component which has the substantially same function structure, duplication description is abbreviate | omitted by attaching | subjecting the same code | symbol.

 なお、説明は以䞋の順序で行うものずする。
 はじめに
 システムの抂略的な構成
 各装眮の構成
  基地局の構成
  端末装眮の構成
 第の実斜圢態
  技術的課題
  技術的特城
  凊理の流れ
 第の実斜圢態
  技術的課題
  技術的特城
  凊理の流れ
 第の実斜圢態
  技術的課題
  技術的特城
  凊理の流れ
 第の実斜圢態
  技術的課題
  技術的特城
  凊理の流れ
 第の実斜圢態
  技術的課題
  技術的特城
  凊理の流れ
 応甚䟋
  基地局に関する応甚䟋
  端末装眮に関する応甚䟋
 たずめ
The description will be made in the following order.
1. 1. Introduction 2. Schematic configuration of system Configuration of each device 3.1. Configuration of base station 3.3. 3. Configuration of terminal device First embodiment 4.1. Technical issues 4.2. Technical features 4.3. Process flow Second Embodiment 5.1. Technical issues 5.2. Technical features 5.3. Flow of processing Third Embodiment 6.1. Technical issues 6.2. Technical features 6.3. Process flow Fourth Embodiment 7.1. Technical issues 7.2. Technical features 7.3. Flow of processing Fifth embodiment 8.1. Technical issues 8.2. Technical features 8.3. Process flow 9. Application example 9.1. Application examples related to base stations 9.2. Application example regarding terminal device 10. Summary

 はじめに
 はじめに、図図を参照しお、送信タむミングの調敎、及びAcknowledgementNegative Acknowledgementの送信タむミングを説明する。
<< 1. Introduction >>
First, the UL transmission timing adjustment and the transmission timing of ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) will be described with reference to FIGS.

 送信タむミングの調敎
 タむミングアドバンスTiming Advance
 基地局䟋えば、evolved Node Bず端末装眮䟋えば、User Equipmentずの間の距離及び䌝搬遅延は、端末装眮によっお異なる。そのため、耇数の端末装眮からの信号の基地局における受信タむミングが同期するように、䞊蚘耇数の端末装眮の各々の送信タむミングが調敎される。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局は、タむミングアドバンスコマンドを端末装眮に通知し、端末装眮は、圓該コマンドに基づいお、送信タむミングを調敎adjustする。
(1) UL transmission timing adjustment (a) Timing Advance (TA)
The distance and propagation delay between a base station (for example, eNB (evolved Node B)) and a terminal device (for example, UE (User Equipment)) vary depending on the terminal device. Therefore, the UL transmission timing of each of the plurality of terminal devices is adjusted so that the reception timings of the UL signals from the plurality of terminal devices are synchronized. More specifically, for example, the base station notifies the terminal device of a timing advance (TA) command, and the terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing based on the TA command.

 の初期倀
 䟋えば、端末装眮がランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信するず、基地局は、䟋えば、を瀺すコマンドを含むランダムアクセスレスポンスを䞊蚘端末装眮ぞ送信する。そしお、䞊蚘端末装眮は、からを算出する。そしお、䞊蚘端末装眮は、受信タむミングず、ずに基づいお、送信タむミングを調敎する。
(A-1) Initial value of TA For example, when a terminal device transmits a random access preamble, the base station sends a random access response including a TA command indicating T A (eg, T A = 0 to 1282) to the terminal device. Send to. Then, the terminal device calculates the N TA (N TA = T A * 16) from T A. Then, the terminal device includes a DL reception timing, based on the N TA, to adjust the UL transmission timing.

 のケヌスでは、即ち、送信タむミングず受信タむミングずのの差分は、である。は、マむクロ秒である。 In FDD case, TA (i.e., the difference of the UL transmission timing and DL reception timing) is a N TA * T S. T S is a 1 / 30.72 microseconds (us).

 䞀方、のケヌスでは、は、である。のオフセットは、基地局における受信から送信ぞの切替えを蚱容するためのものである。 On the other hand, in the case of TDD, TA is (N TA +624) * T S. Offset of 624 * T S is for allowing the switch to DL transmission from UL reception at the base station.

 このように、から぀のが導かれるので、は、を瀺す情報であるず蚀える。 Thus, since one TA is derived from the N TA, N TA can be said to be information indicating the TA.

 aの曎新
 ランダムアクセス凊理埌には、基地局は、の曎新のために、䟋えば、を瀺すコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。そしお、䞊蚘端末装眮は、及びから、を算出する。そしお、䞊蚘端末装眮は、受信タむミングず、ずに基づいお、送信タむミングを調敎する。
(A-2) TA Update After the random access processing, the base station notifies the terminal device of a TA command indicating T A (eg, T A = 0 to 63) for TA update. Then, the terminal device, the N TA, old and T A, calculates N TA, New (N TA, New = N TA, old + (T A -31) * 16) a. And the said terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing based on DL reception timing and NTA, New .

 aの䟋
 図は、のケヌスにおけるの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、のケヌスにおける基地局及び端末装眮の送受信タむミングが瀺されおいる。䟋えば、基地局では、送信タむミングず受信タむミングずが同期しおいる。換蚀するず、圓該基地局では、フレヌムタむミングずフレヌムタむミングずが同期しおいる。䞀方、䌝搬遅延に起因しお、端末装眮における受信タむミングは、䞊蚘基地局における送信タむミングよりも遅く、䞊蚘端末装眮における送信タむミングは、䞊蚘基地局における受信タむミングよりも早い。䞊蚘端末装眮における送信タむミングは、䞊蚘端末装眮における受信タむミングよりも、だけ早い。
(A-3) Example of TA FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the FDD case. Referring to FIG. 1, transmission / reception timings of a base station and a terminal device in the FDD case are shown. For example, in the base station, the DL transmission timing and the UL reception timing are synchronized. In other words, in the base station, the DL frame timing and the UL frame timing are synchronized. On the other hand, due to the propagation delay, the DL reception timing in the terminal device is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station. The UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA91 than the DL reception timing in the terminal device.

 図は、のケヌスにおけるの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、のケヌスにおける基地局及び端末装眮の送受信タむミングが瀺されおいる。のケヌスでも、䌝搬遅延に起因しお、端末装眮における受信タむミングは、基地局における送信タむミングよりも遅く、䞊蚘端末装眮における送信タむミングは、䞊蚘基地局における受信タむミングよりも早い。䞊蚘端末装眮における送信タむミングは、䞊蚘端末装眮における受信タむミングよりも、だけ早い。なお、基地局においお、受信から送信ぞの切替えに、時間を芁する。同様に、端末装眮においおも、受信から送信ぞの切替えに、時間を芁する。 FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of TA in the TDD case. Referring to FIG. 2, transmission / reception timings of the base station and the terminal device in the TDD case are shown. Even in the case of TDD, due to the propagation delay, the DL reception timing in the terminal apparatus is later than the DL transmission timing in the base station, and the UL transmission timing in the terminal apparatus is earlier than the UL reception timing in the base station. The UL transmission timing in the terminal device is earlier by TA93 than the DL reception timing 95 in the terminal device. In the base station, it takes time 97 to switch from UL reception to DL transmission. Similarly, in the terminal device, it takes time 99 to switch from DL reception to UL transmission.

 タむミングアドバンスグルヌプTiming Advance Group
 端末装眮は、キャリアアグリゲヌションにより、最倧぀のコンポヌネントキャリアComponent Carrierを同時に䜿甚するこずができる。端末装眮は、受信タむミングず、を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、プラむマリセルのPhysical Uplink Control ChannelPhysical Uplink Shared ChannelSounding Reference Signalに぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。さらに、端末装眮は、受信タむミングず、を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、セカンダリセルのに぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。
(B) Timing Advance Group (TAG)
The terminal device can use up to five component carriers (CC) simultaneously by carrier aggregation. The terminal apparatus adjusts the UL transmission timing for PUCCH (Physical Uplink Control Channel) / PUSCH (Physical Uplink Shared Channel) / SRS (Sounding Reference Signal) of the primary cell based on the DL reception timing and the information indicating TA. To do. Furthermore, a terminal device adjusts UL transmission timing about PUSCH / SRS of a secondary cell based on DL reception timing and information indicating TA.

 䟋えば、同䞀の基地局が、同期した耇数のを䜿甚する堎合には、圓該耇数のに共通のが䜿甚される。この堎合に、䞊蚘耇数のは、同䞀のタむミングアドバンスグルヌプに属し、䞊蚘は、こののである。端末装眮は、耇数ののを管理する。端末装眮は、あるに属するに぀いおの送信タむミングを、圓該あるのに基づいお調敎する。コマンドMedium Access Controlコントロヌル゚レメントは、ビットの 、及びビットのコマンドを含む。 For example, when the same base station uses a plurality of synchronized CCs, a common TA is used for the plurality of CCs. In this case, the plurality of CCs belong to the same timing advance group (TAG), and the TA is a TA of this TAG. The terminal device manages TAs of a plurality of TAGs. The terminal device adjusts the UL transmission timing for a CC belonging to a certain TAG based on the TA of the certain TAG. The TA command MAC (Medium Access Control) control element includes a 2-bit TAG ID and a 6-bit TA command.

 の送信
 
 では、デヌタに぀いおのは、圓該デヌタが送信されるサブフレヌムのサブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌムにおいお送信される。以䞋、この点に぀いお図を参照しお具䜓䟋を説明する。
(2) Transmission of ACK / NACK (a) FDD
In FDD-LTE, ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted in a subframe four subframes after the subframe in which the DL data is transmitted. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、におけるの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域のサブフレヌムず、の垯域のサブフレヌムずが瀺されおいる。䟋えば、デヌタが、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。同様に、デヌタが、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。 FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK in FDD-LTE. Referring to FIG. 3, a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 0, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 4. Similarly, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 1, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 5.

 
 のケヌスでは、デヌタが送信されるサブフレヌムのサブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌムが、サブフレヌムであるずは限らない。そのため、のコンフィギュレヌションごずに、デヌタが送信されるサブフレヌムず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのが送信されるサブフレヌムずの察応が、Third Generation Partnership Project   においお芏定されおいる。以䞋、図を参照しお、のコンフィギュレヌションの䟋を説明する。
(B) TDD
In the case of TDD, a subframe four subframes after a subframe in which DL data is transmitted is not necessarily a UL subframe. Therefore, for each TDD UL / DL configuration, the correspondence between the DL subframe in which DL data is transmitted and the UL subframe in which ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted is 3GPP (Third Generation Partnership Project). It is specified in TS36.213 Table 10.1.3.3.1-1. Hereinafter, an example of the UL / DL configuration of TDD will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、のコンフィギュレヌションの䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、のコンフィギュレヌションずしお、コンフィギュレヌションが瀺されおいる。このように、では、コンフィギュレヌションによっお、サブフレヌム及びサブフレヌムの数及び配眮が異なる。なお、コンフィギュレヌションは、  に含たれる に瀺されおいるものず同じである。 FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the TDD UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 4, configurations 0 to 6 are shown as UL / DL configurations of TDD. Thus, in TDD, the number and arrangement of UL subframes and DL subframes differ depending on the configuration. Configurations 0 to 6 are the same as those shown in Table 4.2.2 included in 3GPP TS 36.211.

 システムの抂略的な構成
 続いお、図図を参照しお、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係るシステムの抂略的な構成を説明する。図は、本実斜圢態に係るシステムの抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺す説明図である。図を参照するず、システムは、基地局及び端末装眮を含む。
<< 2. Schematic configuration of system >>
Next, a schematic configuration of the system 1 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of the system 1 according to the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 5, the system 1 includes a base station 100 and a terminal device 200.

 基地局
 基地局は、移動䜓通信システム又はセルラヌシステムの基地局である。䞀䟋ずしお、圓該移動䜓通信システムは、、、又はこれらに準ずる通信芏栌に準拠したシステムである。基地局は、をサポヌトし、の垯域及び垯域を䜿甚しお、セル内に䜍眮する端末装眮ずの無線通信を行う。䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域は、のコンポヌネントキャリアであり、䞊蚘垯域は、のである。
(1) Base station 100
Base station 100 is a base station of a mobile communication system (or cellular system). As an example, the mobile communication system is a system that complies with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard equivalent thereto. The base station 100 supports FDD and performs radio communication with a terminal device (located in the cell 101) using the DL band and UL band of the FDD. For example, the UL band is a UL component carrier (CC), and the DL band is a DL CC.

 ずりわけ、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。 In particular, the base station 100 determines whether the UL band is between the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. Switch the operation mode.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお端末装眮ぞの信号を送信し、䞊蚘垯域においお端末装眮からの信号を受信する。 For example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band and receives a UL signal from the terminal device in the UL band.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお端末装眮ぞの信号を送信し、さらに、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで端末装眮ぞの信号を送信する。たた、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで端末装眮からの信号を受信する。 For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device in the DL band, and further transmits the DL signal to the terminal device in a DL subframe in the UL band. DL signal is transmitted. Moreover, the base station 100 receives the UL signal from the terminal device in the UL subframe in the UL band.

 端末装眮
 端末装眮は、䞊蚘移動䜓通信システム又はセルラヌシステムにおいお通信可胜な端末装眮である。ずりわけ、基地局は、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする。
(2) Terminal device 200
The terminal device 200 is a terminal device that can communicate in the mobile communication system (or cellular system). In particular, the base station 100 supports the second mode.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお基地局からの信号を受信し、䞊蚘垯域においお基地局ぞの信号を送信する。 For example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the terminal device 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band and transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band. To do.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお基地局からの信号を受信し、さらに、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで基地局からの信号を受信する。たた、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで基地局ぞの信号を送信する。 For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal apparatus 200 receives a DL signal from the base station 100 in the DL band, and further, in the UL band, the base station 100 in a DL subframe. The DL signal from is received. Also, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal to the base station 100 in the UL band in the UL subframe.

 
 マクロセルのケヌス
 䟋えば、基地局は、マクロセルの基地局である。即ち、セルは、マクロセルである。以䞋、この点に぀いお図を参照しお、具䜓䟋を説明する。
(3) HetNet
(A) Case of Macro Cell For example, the base station 100 is a macro cell base station. That is, the cell 101 is a macro cell. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、基地局がマクロセルの基地局であるケヌスを説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、基地局及び端末装眮が瀺されおいる。この䟋では、基地局は、マクロセルの基地局であり、セルは、スモヌルセルず重なるマクロセルである。䟋えば、端末装眮は、スモヌルセル内に䜍眮する堎合に、スモヌルセルの基地局ずの無線通信を行うこずが可胜である。 FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a macro cell base station. Referring to FIG. 6, a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown. In this example, the base station 100 is a macro cell base station, and the cell 101 is a macro cell overlapping the small cell 21. For example, when the terminal device 200 is located in the small cell 21, the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 20 of the small cell 21.

 スモヌルセルのケヌス
 基地局は、スモヌルセルの基地局であっおもよい。即ち、セルは、スモヌルセルであっおもよい。以䞋、この点に぀いお図を参照しお、具䜓䟋を説明する。
(B) Small Cell Case The base station 100 may be a small cell base station. That is, the cell 101 may be a small cell. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、基地局がスモヌルセルの基地局であるケヌスを説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、基地局及び端末装眮が瀺されおいる。この䟋では、基地局は、スモヌルセルの基地局であり、セルは、マクロセルず重なるスモヌルセルである。䟋えば、端末装眮は、マクロセル内に䜍眮する堎合に、マクロセルの基地局ずの無線通信を行うこずが可胜である。 FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the base station 100 is a small cell base station. Referring to FIG. 7, a base station 100 and a terminal device 200 are shown. In this example, the base station 100 is a small cell base station, and the cell 101 is a small cell overlapping the macro cell 31. For example, when the terminal device 200 is located in the macro cell 31, the terminal device 200 can perform wireless communication with the base station 30 of the macro cell 31.

 各装眮の構成
 続いお、図図を参照しお、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る基地局及び端末装眮の構成を説明する
<< 3. Configuration of each device >>
Subsequently, the configurations of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS.

 基地局の構成
 たず、図を参照しお、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る基地局の構成の䞀䟋を説明する。図は、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る基地局の構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。図を参照するず、基地局は、アンテナ郚、無線通信郚、ネットワヌク通信郚、蚘憶郚及び凊理郚を備える。
<3.1. Base station configuration>
First, an example of a configuration of the base station 100 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the base station 100 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 8, the base station 100 includes an antenna unit 110, a wireless communication unit 120, a network communication unit 130, a storage unit 140, and a processing unit 150.

 アンテナ郚
 アンテナ郚は、無線通信郚により出力される信号を電波ずしお空間に攟射する。たた、アンテナ郚は、空間の電波を信号に倉換し、圓該信号を無線通信郚ぞ出力する。
(1) Antenna unit 110
The antenna unit 110 radiates a signal output from the wireless communication unit 120 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 110 converts radio waves in space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 120.

 無線通信郚
 無線通信郚は、信号を送受信する。䟋えば、無線通信郚は、端末装眮ぞの信号を送信し、端末装眮からの信号を受信する。
(2) Wireless communication unit 120
The wireless communication unit 120 transmits and receives signals. For example, the radio communication unit 120 transmits a DL signal to the terminal device and receives a UL signal from the terminal device.

 ネットワヌク通信郚
 ネットワヌク通信郚は、情報を送受信する。䟋えば、ネットワヌク通信郚は、他のノヌドぞの情報を送信し、他のノヌドからの情報を受信する。䟋えば、䞊蚘他のノヌドは、他の基地局及びコアネットワヌクノヌドを含む。
(3) Network communication unit 130
The network communication unit 130 transmits and receives information. For example, the network communication unit 130 transmits information to other nodes and receives information from other nodes. For example, the other nodes include other base stations and core network nodes.

 蚘憶郚
 蚘憶郚は、基地局の動䜜のためのプログラム及び様々なデヌタを䞀時的に又は恒久的に蚘憶する。
(4) Storage unit 140
The storage unit 140 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the base station 100 and various data.

 凊理郚
 凊理郚は、基地局の様々な機胜を提䟛する。凊理郚は、切替郚及び制埡郚を含む。なお、凊理郚は、これらの構成芁玠以倖の他の構成芁玠をさらに含み埗る。即ち、凊理郚は、これらの構成芁玠の動䜜以倖の動䜜も行い埗る。
(5) Processing unit 150
The processing unit 150 provides various functions of the base station 100. The processing unit 150 includes a switching unit 151 and a control unit 153. The processing unit 150 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 150 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.

 切替郚及び制埡郚は、埌に詳现に説明する。 The switching unit 151 and the control unit 153 will be described in detail later.

 端末装眮の構成
 たず、図及び図を参照しお、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る端末装眮の構成の䞀䟋を説明する。図は、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る端末装眮の構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。図を参照するず、端末装眮は、アンテナ郚、無線通信郚、蚘憶郚及び凊理郚を備える。
<3.2. Configuration of terminal device>
First, an example of the configuration of the terminal device 200 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating an exemplary configuration of the terminal device 200 according to an embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 9, the terminal device 200 includes an antenna unit 210, a wireless communication unit 220, a storage unit 230, and a processing unit 240.

 アンテナ郚
 アンテナ郚は、無線通信郚により出力される信号を電波ずしお空間に攟射する。たた、アンテナ郚は、空間の電波を信号に倉換し、圓該信号を無線通信郚ぞ出力する。
(1) Antenna unit 210
The antenna unit 210 radiates the signal output from the wireless communication unit 220 to the space as a radio wave. Further, the antenna unit 210 converts a radio wave in the space into a signal and outputs the signal to the wireless communication unit 220.

 無線通信郚
 無線通信郚は、信号を送受信する。䟋えば、無線通信郚は、基地局からの信号を受信し、基地局ぞの信号を送信する。以䞋、図を参照しお、無線通信郚に含たれるハヌドりェアの䞀䟋を説明する。
(2) Wireless communication unit 220
The wireless communication unit 220 transmits and receives signals. For example, the radio communication unit 220 receives a DL signal from the base station and transmits a UL signal to the base station. Hereinafter, an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る端末装眮の無線通信郚に含たれるハヌドりェアの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、無線通信郚に含たれる受信回路、送信回路、受信回路が瀺されおいる。たた、の垯域のため局郚発振噚local oscillator、及び、の垯域のための局郚発振噚も瀺されおいる。さらに、アンテナ郚に含たれるアンテナも瀺されおいる。䟋えば、垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドが、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドである堎合には、受信回路及び送信回路が甚いられる。䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドである堎合には、受信回路及び送信回路に加えお、受信回路が甚いられる。より具䜓的に、時分割で、送信回路及び受信回路が甚いられる。 FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of hardware included in the wireless communication unit 220 of the terminal device 200 according to the embodiment of the present disclosure. Referring to FIG. 10, an FDD-DL reception circuit 221, an FDD-UL transmission circuit 223, and a TDD-DL reception circuit 225 included in the wireless communication unit 220 are illustrated. Also shown are a local oscillator 227 for the FDD UL band and a local oscillator 229 for the FDD DL band. Further, an antenna 211 included in the antenna unit 210 is also shown. For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the first mode in which the UL band is used for UL, the FDD-DL reception circuit 221 and the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 are used. For example, when the operation mode is the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division, in addition to the FDD-DL reception circuit 221 and the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223, A TDD-DL reception circuit 225 is used. More specifically, the FDD-UL transmission circuit 223 and the TDD-DL reception circuit 225 are used in a time division manner.

 蚘憶郚
 蚘憶郚は、端末装眮の動䜜のためのプログラム及び様々なデヌタを䞀時的に又は恒久的に蚘憶する。
(3) Storage unit 230
The storage unit 230 temporarily or permanently stores a program for operating the terminal device 200 and various data.

 凊理郚
 凊理郚は、端末装眮の様々な機胜を提䟛する。凊理郚は、情報取埗郚及び制埡郚を含む。なお、凊理郚は、これらの構成芁玠以倖の他の構成芁玠をさらに含み埗る。即ち、凊理郚は、これらの構成芁玠の動䜜以倖の動䜜も行い埗る。
(4) Processing unit 240
The processing unit 240 provides various functions of the terminal device 200. The processing unit 240 includes an information acquisition unit 241 and a control unit 243. Note that the processing unit 240 may further include other components other than these components. That is, the processing unit 240 can perform operations other than the operations of these components.

 情報取埗郚及び制埡郚は、埌に詳现に説明する。 The information acquisition unit 241 and the control unit 243 will be described in detail later.

 第の実斜圢態
 続いお、図図を参照しお、本開瀺の第の実斜圢態を説明する。
<< 4. First Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a first embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14.

 技術的課題
 たず、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題を説明する。
<4.1. Technical issues>
First, a technical problem according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

 の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する手法が怜蚎されおいる。圓該手法は、フレキシブルデュプレクスず呌ばれ埗る。 A method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner is being studied. This approach can be referred to as flexible duplex.

 しかし、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合には、圓該垯域においお無線通信が良奜に行われない可胜性がある。 However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、垯域におけるからぞの切替えに起因しお、圓該垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングが遅れる。その結果、の垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信のタむミングずの間にずれが生じ埗る。そのため、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずしお調敎された送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずしお調敎された送信タむミングずは、異なり埗る。よっお、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟されない可胜性がある。以䞋、この点に぀いお図を参照しお切替えに起因する送信タむミングの遅延の具䜓䟋を説明する。 More specifically, for example, due to switching from UL to DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed. As a result, there may be a difference between the DL transmission timing for the FDD DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band. For this reason, the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the DL band may be different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized. In the following, a specific example of the DL transmission timing delay caused by switching will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、垯域におけるずずの切替えに起因する送信タむミングの遅延の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドでの基地局における送受信タむミングず、圓該垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドでの圓該基地局における送受信タむミングずが、瀺されおいる。䟋えば、䞊蚘第のモヌドでは、䞊蚘基地局においお送信タむミングず受信タむミングずが同期しおいる。䞀方、䞊蚘第のモヌドでは、䞊蚘垯域におけるからぞの切替えに時間を芁するため、䞊蚘基地局においお、圓該垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングが、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも遅れる。その結果、端末装眮でも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングが、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングよりも送れる。そのため、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘受信タむミングを基準ずしお調敎される送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘受信タむミングを基準ずしお調敎される送信タむミングずが、異なる。よっお、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟されない可胜性がある。 FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a delay in DL transmission timing caused by switching between UL and DL in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 11, the transmission / reception timing in the base station in the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and the second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The transmission / reception timing in the base station is shown. For example, in the first mode, DL transmission timing and UL reception timing are synchronized in the base station. On the other hand, in the second mode, since time 81 is required for switching from the UL to the DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band in the base station is higher than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Also late. As a result, even in the terminal device, the DL reception timing for the UL band can be sent more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the DL band is different from the UL transmission timing adjusted based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Therefore, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station may not be realized.

 そこで、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずを可胜にする仕組みが提䟛されるこずが望たしい。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に基地局における受信タむミングの同期を実珟するこずを可胜にする仕組みが提䟛されるこずが望たしい。 Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. More specifically, for example, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables synchronization of UL reception timing in a base station when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. .

 技術的特城
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的特城を説明する。
<4.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

 動䜜モヌドの切替え
 基地局切替郚は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.

 切替えのトリガ
 䟋えば、セルにおいおのトラフィックがのトラフィックよりも十分に倧きくなり、䞔぀、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする端末装眮の数が十分であれば、基地局切替郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドに切り替える。
(A) Switching trigger For example, if DL traffic in the cell 101 is sufficiently larger than UL traffic and the number of terminal devices supporting the second mode is sufficient, the base station 100 (switching The unit 151) switches the operation mode for the UL band from the first mode to the second mode.

 切替え前埌での送信タむミング
 䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えの前埌で、送信タむミング換蚀するず、フレヌムタむミングを倉曎しない。これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトしない端末装眮以䞋、「レガシヌ端末」ず呌ぶぞの圱響をより小さくするこずが可胜になる。
(B) UL transmission timing before and after switching For example, the base station 100 does not change the UL transmission timing (in other words, UL frame timing) before and after switching the operation mode for the UL band. Thereby, for example, it is possible to further reduce the influence on a terminal device that does not support the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “legacy terminal”).

 なお、䞊蚘第のモヌドでは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングは、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えに起因する遅延の分だけ、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも遅くなる。この点に぀いおは、図を参照しお説明したずおりである。 In the second mode, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is later than the DL transmission timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band by the delay caused by the switching of the operation mode. Become. This point is as described with reference to FIG.

 切替えの通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のモヌドず䞊蚘第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報以䞋、「モヌド切替え情報」ず呌ぶを、端末装眮に通知する。
(C) Notification of switching For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the switching of the operation mode between the first mode and the second mode (hereinafter, “mode switching information”). To the terminal device 200.

 具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、システム情報System Informationの䞭で、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。あるいは、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮ぞの個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。䟋えば、圓該個別のシグナリングは、Radio Resource Controlシグナリングであっおもよい。 Specifically, for example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information in the system information (System Information). Alternatively, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200. For example, the individual signaling may be RRC (Radio Resource Control) signaling.

 切替えに応じた端末装眮の動䜜
 端末装眮情報取埗郚は、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報を取埗する。端末装眮は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域においお送信を行い、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域においお受信及び送信を行う。
(D) Operation of terminal device 200 in response to switching The terminal device 200 (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the mode switching information. The terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and performs DL reception and UL in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. Send.

 端末装眮の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域における送信のための凊理を行い、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域における受信及び送信のための凊理を行う。 The control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for UL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the first mode, and when the operation mode is the second mode, Processing for DL reception and UL transmission in the UL band is performed.

 タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺
 第の実斜圢態では、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスtiming advanceに぀いおの指瀺、及び、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺を行う。
(2) Instruction about timing advance In the first embodiment, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines the first timing advance (TA) based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. An instruction and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band are given.

 ずりわけ第の実斜圢態では、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺、及び䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺は、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする同䞀の端末装眮ぞの指瀺である。 In particular, in the first embodiment, the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA are instructions to the same terminal device 200 that supports the second mode.

 䞀方、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。あるいは、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 On the other hand, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) determines the UL reception based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA. The UL transmission timing for the band is adjusted. Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.

 第のモヌドでの指瀺
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺、及び䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。
(A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.

 第の及び第の
 䟋えば、䞊蚘第のは、䞊蚘第のよりも長い。以䞋、図を参照しお、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第のの具䜓䟋を説明する。
(B) First TA and second TA
For example, the second TA is longer than the first TA. Hereinafter, specific examples of the first TA and the second TA will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、第の及び第のの䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドが第のモヌドである堎合における基地局及び端末装眮の送受信タむミングが瀺されおいる。基地局では、垯域におけるからぞの切替えに時間を芁するため、圓該垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングが、垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも遅れる。その結果、端末装眮でも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングが、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングよりも送れる。そのため、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺ず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺ずを行う。第のは、第のよりも長い。端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信タむミングを調敎する。あるいは、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信タむミングを調敎する。 FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining examples of the first TA and the second TA. Referring to FIG. 12, transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown. Since the base station 100 requires time 41 for switching from UL to DL in the UL band, the DL transmission timing for the UL band is delayed from the DL transmission timing for the DL band. As a result, the terminal apparatus 200 can send the DL reception timing for the UL band more than the DL reception timing for the DL band. Therefore, the base station 100 (control unit 153) instructs the first TA 43 based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the second TA 45 based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. And give instructions. The second TA45 is longer than the first TA43. The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and information indicating the first TA 43. Or the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing in the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said UL band, and the information which shows 2nd TA45.

 指瀺の手法
 タむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、タむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺、及び䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。
(C) Instruction Method (c-1) Notification of Timing Advance Command For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) receives the instruction about the first TA and the above-mentioned instruction by notification of the timing advance (TA) command. The above instruction for the second TA is performed.

  個々のコマンド
 䟋えば、䞊蚘コマンドは、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず、䞊蚘第のためのコマンドずを含む。即ち、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの指瀺を行い、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの指瀺を行う。
-Individual TA command For example, the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.

 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報を生成し、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報を生成する。 For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA, and the TA command for the second TA. Based on the above, information indicating the second TA is generated.

 具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のを調敎するためのを瀺すコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。さらに、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のを調敎するためのを瀺すコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、端末装眮は、から、䞊蚘第のに぀いおのを算出する。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報であるを生成する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングずずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。あるいは、端末装眮は、から、䞊蚘第のに぀いおのを算出する。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報であるを生成する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングずずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 Specifically, for example, base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA to the terminal apparatus 200. Furthermore, the base station 100 (control section 153) notifies the TA command indicating T A2 for adjusting the second TA to the terminal apparatus 200. For example, the terminal device 200 calculates N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and NTAl . Alternatively, the terminal device 200, the T A2, to calculate the N TA2 for the second TA. That is, the terminal device 200 generates N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA. Then, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and NTA2 .

 これにより、䟋えば、぀のを別々に曎新するこずが可胜になる。そのため、端末装眮は、垯域に぀いおの受信タむミング、及び䞊蚘に぀いおの受信タむミングのいずれに基づいおも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを適切に調敎するこずが可胜になる。たた、䞊蚘垯域ずは遅延分散が異なる䞊蚘垯域における受信タむミングではなく、䞊蚘垯域における受信タむミングに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信タむミングを調敎するこずにより、より高い粟床でのタむミング調敎が可胜になる。 This makes it possible, for example, to update two TAs separately. Therefore, the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL. Also, by adjusting the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing in the UL band, not the DL reception timing in the DL band, which has a delay dispersion different from that of the UL band, it is possible to achieve higher accuracy. Timing adjustment is possible.

  タむミングアドバンスグルヌプ
 䟋えば、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドは、第ののためのコマンドであり、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドは、䞊蚘第のずは異なる第ののためのコマンドである。
-Timing Advance Group (TAG)
For example, the TA command for the first TA is a command for the first TAG, and the TA command for the second TA is different from the first TAG. This is a command for TAG.

 具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず䞊蚘第のの ずを含むコントロヌル゚レメントを、端末装眮ぞ送信する。さらに、基地局は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず䞊蚘第のの ずを含むコントロヌル゚レメントを、端末装眮ぞ送信する。 Specifically, for example, the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the first TA and a TAG ID of the first TAG to the terminal device 200. Further, the base station 100 transmits a MAC control element including a TA command for the second TA and a TAG ID of the second TAG to the terminal device 200.

 これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドずを区別するこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can distinguish between the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.

 オフセットの通知
 基地局制埡郚は、コマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの䞀方に぀いおの指瀺を行い、䞊蚘第のず䞊蚘第のずの間のオフセットを瀺す情報以䞋、「オフセット情報」ず呌ぶの通知により、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの他方に぀いおの指瀺を行っおもよい。
(C-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives an instruction for one of the first TA and the second TA in response to the notification of the TA command, and the first TA Even if an instruction is given for the other of the first TA and the second TA by notification of information indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (hereinafter referred to as “offset information”) Good.

 端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの䞊蚘䞀方を瀺す情報を生成し、圓該情報ず䞊蚘オフセット情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの䞊蚘他方を瀺す情報を生成しおもよい。 The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the one of the first TA and the second TA based on the TA command, and based on the information and the offset information Information indicating the other of the first TA and the second TA may be generated.

 䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの䞀方は、䞊蚘第のであり、䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第ののうちの他方は、䞊蚘第のであっおもよい。 One of the first TA and the second TA is the first TA, and the other of the first TA and the second TA is the second TA. Also good.

  具䜓的な䟋
 具䜓的には、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のを調敎するためのを瀺すコマンドを端末装眮に通知しおもよい。端末装眮は、から、䞊蚘第のに぀いおのを算出しおもよい。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報であるを生成しおもよい。たた、基地局制埡郚は、䟋えば、システム情報の䞭で、又はシグナリングにより、䞊蚘第のず䞊蚘第のずの間のオフセットを瀺す情報オフセット情報であるを端末装眮に通知しおもよい。端末装眮は、ずずから、䟋えば、を算出しおもよい。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報であるを生成しおもよい。なお、は、所定倀䟋えば、であっおもよい。
- Specific examples specifically, the base station 100 (control section 153) is a TA command indicating T A1 for adjusting said first TA may notify the terminal device 200. The terminal device 200 may calculate N TA1 for the first TA from T A1 . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA1 that is information indicating the first TA. Further, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is information (offset information) indicating an offset between the first TA and the second TA (for example, in system information or by signaling). A certain NTA_offset may be notified to the terminal device 200. The terminal device 200 may calculate N TA2 (for example, N TA1 + N TA_offset ) from N TA1 and N TA_offset . That is, the terminal device 200 may generate N TA2 that is information indicating the second TA. Note that NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).

  オフセットの䜿甚の手法
  動䜜モヌドの切替えの際の䜿甚
 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域の䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドに切り替わる際に、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、ず、䞊蚘オフセット情報䟋えば、ずから、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、を初期倀ずしお生成しおもよい。その埌、端末装眮は、䞊蚘第のコマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、を生成曎新しおもよい。
—Method of using offset——Use when switching operation mode The terminal apparatus 200 uses the first TA when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode. The information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated as an initial value from the information indicating the second TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ). Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA2 ) indicating the second TA based on the second TA command.

  継続的な䜿甚
 あるいは、端末装眮は、継続的に、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、ず、䞊蚘オフセット情報䟋えば、ずから、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、を生成しおもよい。
--- Continuous use Alternatively, the terminal device 200 continuously obtains the second information from the information indicating the first TA (for example, N TA1 ) and the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ). The information indicating TA (for example, N TA2 ) may be generated.

  通知の䟋
  通知の手法
 基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘オフセット情報の通知を行っおもよい。あるいは、基地局制埡郚は、シグナリングにより、䞊蚘オフセット情報の通知を行っおもよい。
—Example of Notification——Method of Notification The base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the offset information in the system information. Alternatively, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the offset information by signaling.

  通知のタむミング
 基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第の動䜜モヌドである堎合に限らず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘オフセット情報の通知を行っおもよい。即ち、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第の動䜜モヌドである堎合に限らず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行っおもよい。
-Timing of notification The base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode. Notification may be performed. That is, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) is not limited to the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode, and the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the operation for the second TA when the operation mode is the first mode. The above instructions may be given.

  その他
 基地局が䞊蚘オフセット情報䟋えば、を端末装眮に通知する代わりに、䞊蚘オフセット情報が端末装眮においお予め蚘憶されおいおもよい。
-Others Instead of the base station 100 notifying the terminal device 200 of the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ), the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.

 端末装眮におけるタむミング調敎手法の遞択
 デヌタ
 䟋えば、基地局が、䞊蚘垯域においお、デヌタのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に送信する。この堎合に、䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘デヌタの送信のために、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。
(D) Selection of Timing Adjustment Method in Terminal Apparatus 200 (d-1) UL Data For example, the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal apparatus 200 in the DL band. In this case, for example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.

 䟋えば、基地局が、䞊蚘域においお、サブフレヌムで、デヌタのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に送信する。この堎合に、䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘デヌタの送信のために、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 For example, the base station 100 transmits UL data scheduling information to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL region. In this case, for example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA, for the transmission of the UL data, The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.

 
 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されたデヌタに぀いおのの送信のために、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。
(D-2) ACK / NACK
For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243), for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the first TA indicating the first TA. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.

 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されたデヌタに぀いおのの送信のために、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す䞊蚘情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 For example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) transmits the ACK / NACK for the DL data transmitted in the UL band, and the DL reception timing for the UL band and the second TA The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the information.

 その他
 垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌション
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、コンフィギュレヌションに埓っお䞊蚘垯域における無線通信を行う。
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration for UL band For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the UL / DL is used when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode. Wireless communication in the UL band is performed according to the configuration.

 コンフィギュレヌションの䟋
 䟋えば、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、のコンフィギュレヌションである。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションのいずれかである。
(A-1) UL / DL Configuration Example For example, the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.

 なお、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、のコンフィギュレヌションではなく、別のコンフィギュレヌション䟋えば、に固有のコンフィギュレヌションであっおもよい。 Note that the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.

 コンフィギュレヌションの遞択
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドに切り替えられる堎合に、コンフィギュレヌションを遞択し、圓該コンフィギュレヌションを䞊蚘垯域に適甚する。
(A-2) Selection of UL / DL configuration For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines the UL / DL configuration when the operation mode is switched from the first mode to the second mode. And the UL / DL configuration is applied to the UL band.

 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、セルにおけるのトラフィックずのトラフィックずに基づいお、サブフレヌムずサブフレヌムずの適切な比率を有するコンフィギュレヌションを遞択する。 For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) selects a UL / DL configuration having an appropriate ratio of DL subframes and UL subframes based on DL traffic and UL traffic in the cell 101.

 コンフィギュレヌションの倉曎
 基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎しおもよい。䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、埌述する第の実斜圢態ず同様に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションを倉曎しおもよい。
(A-3) UL / DL configuration change When the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. You may change in UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band in the same manner as in a fifth embodiment to be described later.

 コンフィギュレヌションの通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報以䞋、「コンフィギュレヌション情報」ず呌ぶを端末装眮に通知する。
(A-4) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as “configuration information”) to the terminal. Notify device 200.

 䞀䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報を端末装眮に通知する。䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報は、新たな情報ずしおシステム情報の䞭に含たれおもよい。あるいは、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報は、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで送信されるシステム情報の䞭に、のコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報ずしお含たれおもよい。 As an example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information. The configuration information may be included in the system information as new information. Alternatively, the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.

 別の䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮ぞの個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報を端末装眮に通知する。 As another example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200.

 ランダムアクセス
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域
 䟋えば、基地局は、System Information Blockの䞭で、Physical Random Access Channelコンフィギュレヌションむンデックス及び呚波数オフセットを報知する。これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、ランダムアクセスプリアンブルの送信が蚱可される無線リ゜ヌスランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域を知るこずが可胜になる。
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency domain For example, the base station 100 broadcasts a PRACH (Physical Random Access Channel) configuration index and a PRACH frequency offset in the SIB (System Information Block) 2 . Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can know a radio resource (random access time frequency region) in which transmission of a random access preamble is permitted.

 では、぀のサブフレヌムに぀き、぀のランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域のみが配眮される。無線フレヌムの䞭のいずれのサブフレヌムにランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域が配眮されるかは、コンフィギュレヌションむンデックスから知るこずができる。どのリ゜ヌスブロックにランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域が配眮されるかは、呚波数オフセットから知るこずができる。 In FDD, only one random access time frequency region is arranged per subframe. It can be known from the PRACH configuration index in which subframe in the radio frame the random access time frequency region is arranged. It can be known from the PRACH frequency offset to which resource block the random access time frequency region is arranged.

 䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、サブフレヌムに、ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域を配眮する。 For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 arranges a random access time frequency region in the UL subframe.

 ランダムアクセス手続
 䟋えば、端末装眮は、アむドル状態から接続状態ぞの遷移のために、ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域においおランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信する。
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.

 䟋えば、基地局は、ランダムアクセス応答を端末装眮ぞ送信する。この際に、基地局は、コマンドを端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。あるいは、基地局は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドずを、端末装眮に通知しおもよい。 For example, the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command. For example, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA. Alternatively, the base station 100 may notify the terminal device 200 of the TA command for the first TA and the TA command for the second TA.

 同期信号の送信
 䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域においお同期信号を送信する。
(C) Transmission of synchronization signal For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 transmits a synchronization signal in the UL band.

 䟋えば、基地局の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域における䞊蚘同期信号の送信のための凊理を行う。具䜓的には、䟋えば、制埡郚は、䞊蚘同期信号の生成、及び又は無線リ゜ヌスぞの䞊蚘同期信号のマッピングなどを行う。 For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs processing for transmitting the synchronization signal in the UL band. Specifically, for example, the control unit 243 performs generation of the synchronization signal and / or mapping of the synchronization signal to a radio resource.

 これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においおより正確に同期をずるこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can synchronize more accurately in the UL band.

 同期信号
 䟋えば、䞊蚘同期信号は、䞊蚘垯域においお送信される同期信号ず同様に、セルに察応する信号である。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘同期信号は、Primary Synchronization Signal及びSecondary Synchronization Signalである。
(C-1) Synchronization signal For example, the synchronization signal is a signal corresponding to the cell ID, similarly to the synchronization signal transmitted in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the synchronization signals are PSS (Primary Synchronization Signal) and SSS (Secondary Synchronization Signal).

 所定のサブフレヌムでの送信
 䟋えば、䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚され、䞔぀、無線フレヌムのうちの少なくずも所定のサブフレヌムにおいお䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドである。そしお、基地局の制埡郚は、無線フレヌムのうちの䞊蚘所定のサブフレヌムにおいお、䞊蚘同期信号を送信する。
(C-2) Transmission in a predetermined subframe For example, in the second mode, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division, and at least in a predetermined subframe of radio frames. In this mode, the UL band is used for DL. Then, the control unit 243 of the base station 100 transmits the synchronization signal in the predetermined subframe in the radio frame.

 䟋えば、基地局の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、無線フレヌムのうちの䞊蚘所定のサブフレヌムにおいお同期信号が送信されるように、䞊蚘垯域における同期信号の送信のための凊理を行う。 For example, the control unit 243 of the base station 100 performs synchronization in the UL band so that a synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of the radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Performs processing for signal transmission.

 䞀䟋ずしお、通垞ののケヌスず同様に、䞊蚘所定のサブフレヌムは、サブフレヌム番号、であるサブフレヌム甚のサブフレヌム、及びサブフレヌム番号、であるサブフレヌム甚のサブフレヌムであっおもよい。別の䟋ずしお、通垞ののケヌスず同様に、䞊蚘所定のサブフレヌムは、サブフレヌム番号、であるサブフレヌム及び甚のサブフレヌムであっおもよい。 As an example, as in the case of normal TDD, the predetermined subframes are subframes having subframe numbers 1 and 6 (PSS subframes) and subframes having subframe numbers 0 and 5 (SSS). Subframe). As another example, as in the normal FDD case, the predetermined subframe may be a subframe (subframe for PSS and SSS) having subframe numbers 0 and 5.

 これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域においお同期信号が確実に送信され、端末装眮は䞊蚘垯域においおより確実に同期をずるこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, the synchronization signal is reliably transmitted in the UL band, and the terminal device 200 can be more reliably synchronized in the UL band.

 端末装眮による動䜜
 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘同期信号に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における同期をずる。
(C-3) Operation by Terminal Device For example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) performs synchronization in the UL band based on the synchronization signal.

 スケゞュヌリング
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、無線リ゜ヌスの割圓お即ち、スケゞュヌリングを行う。
(D) Scheduling For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio resource allocation (that is, scheduling).

 レガシヌ端末
  リ゜ヌスの割圓お
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、レガシヌ端末即ち、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトしない端末装眮には、リ゜ヌスずしお、䞊蚘垯域の無線リ゜ヌスを割り圓おる。
(D-1) Legacy terminal-DL resource allocation For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL band as a DL resource to a legacy terminal (ie, a terminal device that does not support the second mode). Allocate radio resources.

 ずりわけ、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のサブフレヌムのサブフレヌム前にあるサブフレヌム内の、䞊蚘垯域の無線リ゜ヌスを、レガシヌ端末に割り圓おる。これにより、䟋えば、圓該レガシヌ端末は、䞊蚘無線リ゜ヌスにおいお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信するこずが可胜になる。 In particular, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, for example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the intra-frame is within 4 frames before the UL subframe of the UL band. The DL band radio resources are allocated to legacy terminals. Thereby, for example, the legacy terminal can transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the radio resource in the UL band.

  スケゞュヌリング情報の通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、スケゞュヌリング情報即ち、無線リ゜ヌスの割圓おを瀺す情報をレガシヌ端末に通知する。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のPhysical Downlink Control Channelにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のPhysical Downlink Shared Channel及び䞊蚘垯域のPhysical Uplink Shared Channelに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報をレガシヌ端末に通知する。
-Notification of scheduling information For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the legacy terminal of scheduling information (that is, information indicating radio resource allocation) in the DL band. More specifically, for example, in the PDCCH (Physical Downlink Control Channel) of the DL band, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the PDSCH (Physical Downlink Shared Channel) of the DL band and the PUSCH (Physical) of the UL band. The legacy terminal is notified of scheduling information on the uplink shared channel.

 端末装眮
  リ゜ヌスの割圓お
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮即ち、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする端末装眮には、リ゜ヌスずしお、䞊蚘垯域の無線リ゜ヌス、又は䞊蚘垯域の無線リ゜ヌスサブフレヌム内の無線リ゜ヌスを割り圓おる。
(D-2) Terminal device 200
-Allocation of DL resource For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits, to the terminal device 200 (that is, a terminal device that supports the second mode), a DL resource as the DL resource, UL band radio resources (radio resources in the DL subframe) are allocated.

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで送信されるリファレンス信号に基づく枬定を行い、枬定結果を基地局に報告しおもよい。そしお、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘枬定結果が良奜であれば䟋えば、受信電力が十分に倧きければ、䞊蚘垯域の無線リ゜ヌスサブフレヌム内の無線リ゜ヌスを端末装眮に割り圓おおもよい。 The terminal device 200 may perform measurement based on the reference signal transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band, and report the measurement result to the base station 100. If the measurement result is good (for example, if the received power is sufficiently large), the base station 100 (the control unit 153) uses the UL band radio resource (the radio resource in the DL subframe) as the terminal device. 200 may be assigned.

  スケゞュヌリング情報の通知
  垯域
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。
—Notification of Scheduling Information—-DL Band For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the PDSCH of the DL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.

  垯域リ゜ヌス
 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘垯域のリ゜ヌスに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。即ち、クロスキャリアスケゞュヌリングが行われる。
-UL band (DL resource)
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the DL resource in the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information for the PDSCH in the UL band in the PDCCH in the DL band. That is, cross carrier scheduling is performed.

 あるいは、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘垯域のリ゜ヌスに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。より具䜓的には、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。 Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the DL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PDSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.

  垯域リ゜ヌス
 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘垯域のリ゜ヌスに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知する。
--UL bandwidth (UL resource)
For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information regarding the UL resource of the UL band in the DL band. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH of the UL band in the PDCCH of the DL band.

 あるいは、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘垯域のリ゜ヌスに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。より具䜓的には、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域のにおいお、䞊蚘垯域のに぀いおのスケゞュヌリング情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。 Alternatively, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the UL resource in the UL band in the UL band. Good. More specifically, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of scheduling information about the PUSCH in the UL band in the UL band PDCCH.

 ケむパビリティ情報の通知
 䟋えば、端末装眮は、フレキシブルデュプレクスFlexible Duplexの可吊を瀺すケむパビリティ情報を基地局に通知する。䟋えば、圓該ケむパビリティ情報は、端末装眮がサポヌトする垯域組合せband combinationごずに、フレキシブルデュプレクスの可吊を瀺す。これにより、䟋えば、基地局は、端末装眮が䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトするこずを知るこずが可胜になる。
(E) Notification of capability information For example, the terminal device 200 notifies the base station 100 of capability information indicating whether or not flexible duplex is possible. For example, the capability information indicates whether flexible duplex is possible for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200. Thereby, for example, the base station 100 can know that the terminal device 200 supports the second mode.

 なお、䞊蚘ケむパビリティ情報は、端末装眮がサポヌトする垯域組合せごずにキャリアアグリゲヌションの可吊及びキャリアアグリゲヌションの可吊をさらに瀺しおもよい。 The capability information may further indicate whether or not DL carrier aggregation and UL carrier aggregation are possible (for each band combination supported by the terminal device 200).

 凊理の流れ
 次に、図及び図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の䟋を説明する。
<4.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.

 第のモヌドでの凊理
 図は、第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。
(1) Processing in First Mode FIG. 13 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the first mode according to the first embodiment.

 基地局は、第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。圓該第のは、の垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S301). The first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band.

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、の垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S303). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S305). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 第のモヌドでの凊理
 図は、第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。
(2) Processing in Second Mode FIG. 14 is a sequence diagram showing an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the first embodiment.

 基地局は、モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該モヌド切替え情報は、第のモヌドず第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報である。ずりわけ、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドであり、䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されるモヌドである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S321). The mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. The first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL, and the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞ切り替える。 The base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S323).

 基地局は、第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。圓該第のは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするである。さらに、基地局は、第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。圓該第のは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the first TA (S325). The first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. Further, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S327). The second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S329). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S331). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S333). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S335). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 以䞊、第の実斜圢態を説明した。第の実斜圢態によれば、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。 The first embodiment has been described above. According to the first embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミング、及び䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングのいずれに基づいおも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを適切に調敎するこずができる。そのため、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟される。その結果、䞊蚘垯域においおより良奜に無線通信が行われ埗る。 More specifically, for example, the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band.

 第の実斜圢態
 続いお、図を参照しお、本開瀺の第の実斜圢態を説明する。
<< 5. Second Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a first embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG.

 技術的課題
 第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題は、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
<5.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the second embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 技術的特城
 次に、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的特城を説明する。
<5.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the second embodiment will be described.

 動䜜モヌドの切替え
 基地局切替郚は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.

 動䜜モヌドの切替えに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。 There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment regarding the switching of the operation mode. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺
 第の実斜圢態では、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺、及び、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺を行う。
(2) Instruction for timing advance In the second embodiment, the base station 100 (control unit 153) instructs the first TA to be based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and the UL band. For the second TA with reference to the DL reception timing for.

 ずりわけ第の実斜圢態では、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺は、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトしないレガシヌ端末ぞの指瀺であり、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺は、䞊蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする端末装眮ぞの指瀺である。 Particularly, in the second embodiment, the instruction for the first TA is an instruction to a legacy terminal that does not support the second mode, and the instruction for the second TA is the second instruction. This is an instruction to the terminal device 200 that supports the mode.

 䞀方、䞊蚘レガシヌ端末は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。ずりわけ第の実斜圢態では、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを適切に調敎するこずができる。 Meanwhile, the legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA. In particular, in the second embodiment, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) transmits the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA. Based on the above, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division.

 第のモヌドでの指瀺
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺、及び䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。
(A) Instruction in the second mode For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153), and the second instruction in the first TA and the second mode The above instructions for TAs are made.

 第の及び第の
 䟋えば、䞊蚘第のは、䞊蚘第のよりも長い。
(B) First TA and second TA
For example, the second TA is longer than the first TA.

 䞊蚘第の及び䞊蚘第のの䟋の説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。 In the description of the example of the first TA and the second TA, there is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 指瀺の手法
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、タむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺、及び䞊蚘第のに぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。
(C) Instruction Method For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) performs the instruction for the first TA and the instruction for the second TA by notification of a timing advance (TA) command. .

  個々のコマンド
 䟋えば、䞊蚘コマンドは、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドず、䞊蚘第のためのコマンドずを含む。即ち、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの指瀺を行い、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘第のに぀いおの指瀺を行う。
-Individual TA command For example, the TA command includes a TA command for the first TA and a TA command for the second TA. That is, the base station 100 (control unit 153) issues an instruction for the first TA by notifying the TA command for the first TA, and by notifying the TA command for the second TA. And instructing the second TA.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘レガシヌ端末は、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報を生成する。端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘第ののための䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報を生成する。 For example, the legacy terminal generates information indicating the first TA based on the TA command for the first TA. The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) generates information indicating the second TA based on the TA command for the second TA.

 その他
 垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌション
 コンフィギュレヌションに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration for UL band There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment in the description of the UL / DL configuration. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス手続
 䟋えば、端末装眮は、アむドル状態から接続状態ぞの遷移のために、ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域においおランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信する。
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.

 䟋えば、基地局は、ランダムアクセス応答を端末装眮ぞ送信する。この際に、基地局は、コマンドを端末装眮に通知する。ずりわけ、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、基地局は、䞊蚘第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 For example, the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command. In particular, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA.

 なお、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、基地局は、第の䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするのためのコマンドを、端末装眮に通知する。ここでの「第の」ずは、単に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするを意味し、特定の端末䟋えば、䞊蚘レガシヌ端末のためのを意味しない。即ち、端末装眮のための「第の」ず、䞊蚘レガシヌ端末のための「第の」ずは、異なるである。 When the operation mode is the first mode, the base station 100 transmits a TA command for the first TA (TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal device. 200 is notified. The “first TA” here simply means a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, and does not mean a TA for a specific terminal (for example, the legacy terminal). That is, the “first TA” for the terminal device 200 and the “first TA” for the legacy terminal are different TAs.

 同期信号の送信
 同期信号の送信に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(C) Transmission of synchronization signal There is no difference between the first embodiment and the second embodiment regarding the transmission of the synchronization signal. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 スケゞュヌリング
 スケヌリングに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ケむパビリティ情報の通知
 ケむパビリティ情報の通知に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 凊理の流れ
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の䟋を説明する。
<5.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

 第のモヌドでの凊理
 第のモヌドでの凊理に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(1) Processing in the first mode The description of the processing in the first mode is not different between the first embodiment and the second embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 第のモヌドでの凊理
 図は、第の実斜圢態に係る第のモヌドでの凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。
(2) Processing in Second Mode FIG. 15 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing in the second mode according to the second embodiment.

 基地局は、モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該モヌド切替え情報は、第のモヌドず第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報である。ずりわけ、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドであり、䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されるモヌドである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S341). The mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. The first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL, and the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞ切り替える。 The base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S343).

 基地局は、第ののためのコマンドをレガシヌ端末に通知する。圓該第のは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするである。さらに、基地局は、第ののためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。圓該第のは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするである。 The base station 100 notifies the legacy terminal of the TA command for the first TA (S345). The first TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. Further, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for the second TA (S347). The second TA is a TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the UL band and the information indicating the second TA (S349). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S351). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 䞊蚘レガシヌ端末は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘第のを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、䞊蚘レガシヌ端末は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The legacy terminal adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the first TA (S353). Then, the legacy terminal performs UL transmission in the UL band (S355). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 以䞊、第の実斜圢態を説明した。第の実斜圢態によれば、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。 The second embodiment has been described above. According to the second embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングに基づかず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そのため、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟される。その結果、䞊蚘垯域においおより良奜に無線通信が行われ埗る。たた、端末装眮のためのの数が増えないので、シグナリングのオヌバヌヘッドの増加が抑えられ埗る。 More specifically, for example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 is not based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, but based on the DL reception timing for the UL band. Then, the UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.

 第の実斜圢態
 続いお、図及び図を参照しお、本開瀺の第の実斜圢態を説明する。
<< 6. Third Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a third embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

 技術的課題
 第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題は、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
<6.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the third embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 技術的特城
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的特城を説明する。
<5.2. Technical features>
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the technical feature which concerns on 3rd Embodiment is demonstrated.

 動䜜モヌドの切替え
 基地局切替郚は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.

 切替えのトリガ
 䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えのトリガに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(A) Trigger for switching The description of the trigger for switching the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 切替えの通知
 䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えの通知぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(B) Notification of switching The description of the notification of switching of the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 切替えに応じた端末装眮の動䜜
 䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えに応じた端末装眮の動䜜぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(C) Operation of terminal device 200 according to switching The description of the operation of the terminal device 200 according to the switching of the operation mode is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ダりンリンク送信のタむミング
 第の実斜圢態では、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングずを同期させる。以䞋、この点に぀いお、図を参照しお具䜓䟋を説明する。
(2) Timing of downlink transmission In the third embodiment, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) determines the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band. The DL transmission timing is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the UL band. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、垯域及び垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングの䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドが第のモヌドである堎合における基地局及び端末装眮の送受信タむミングが瀺されおいる。基地局では、垯域におけるからぞの切替えに時間を芁する。しかし、第の実斜圢態では、基地局は、時間を考慮しお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを、垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず同期させる。その結果、端末装眮では、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングずが同期する。そのため、端末装眮は、受信タむミング䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミング、又は䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングずに基づいお、垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of DL transmission timing for the DL band and the UL band. Referring to FIG. 16, transmission / reception timings of the base station 100 and the terminal device 200 when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode are shown. The base station 100 requires time 51 to switch from UL to DL in the UL band. However, in the second embodiment, the base station 100 considers the time 51 and synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the UL band with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. As a result, in the terminal device 200, for example, the DL reception timing for the DL band and the DL reception timing for the UL band are synchronized. Therefore, the terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing (DL reception timing for the DL band or DL reception timing for the UL band) and the TA 53.

 これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを適切に調敎するこずができる。 Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can appropriately adjust the UL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner.

 なお、本明现曞においお、「タむミングを同期させる」ずは、「タむミング間の差が党くなくなるように、圓該タむミングを同期させる」こずを意味しなくおもよく、䟋えば、「タむミング間の差が所定範囲内に収たるように、圓該タむミングを同期させる」こずを意味しおもよい。 In the present specification, “synchronizing timing” may not mean “synchronizing the timing so that there is no difference between timings”. It may mean that the timing is synchronized so that it falls within a predetermined range.

 アップリンク受信のタむミング
 第のモヌド
 䟋えば、少なくずも䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも所定時間だけ早い。䟋えば、圓該所定時間は、䞊蚘垯域におけるからぞの切替えに芁する時間である。
(3) Timing of uplink reception (a) Second mode For example, when at least the operation mode is the second mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Earlier than the specified time. For example, the predetermined time is a time required for switching from UL to DL in the UL band.

 図を再び参照するず、基地局においお、垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも、時間即ち、䞊蚘垯域におけるからぞの切替えに芁する時間だけ早い。 Referring to FIG. 16 again, in the base station 100, the UL reception timing for the UL band is the time 51 (that is, the time required for switching from the UL to the DL in the UL band) rather than the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Only early.

 これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングずを同期させるこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. It becomes possible to make it.

 第のモヌド
 第の䟋
 第の䟋ずしお、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、基地局においお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず同期する。即ち、基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドに切り替える際に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを䞊蚘所定時間だけ早くする。
(B) First mode (b-1) First example As a first example, when the operation mode is the first mode, in the base station 100, the UL reception timing for the UL band is Synchronize with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. That is, when the operation mode is switched from the first mode to the second mode, the base station 100 advances the UL reception timing for the UL band by the predetermined time.

 第の䟋
 第の䟋ずしお、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にも、基地局においお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも䞊蚘所定時間だけ早くおもよい。即ち、基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えがあったずしおも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを倉曎しなくおもよい。
(B-2) Second Example As a second example, even when the operation mode is the first mode, in the base station 100, the UL reception timing for the UL band is the same as that for the DL band. The predetermined time may be earlier than the DL transmission timing. That is, even if the operation mode is switched, the base station 100 does not have to change the UL reception timing for the UL band.

 タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺
 第の䟋
 䞊述したように、第の䟋ずしお、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず同期する。たた、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも䞊蚘所定時間だけ早い。
(4) Instruction about timing advance (a) First example As described above, as the first example, when the operation mode is the first mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is: It synchronizes with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the UL reception timing for the UL band is earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.

 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えに応じお䞊蚘垯域における送信のが䞊蚘所定時間だけ長くなるように、圓該に぀いおの指瀺を行う。圓該指瀺は、端末装眮ぞの指瀺である。これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘切替えに応じお䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを所定時間だけ早くするこずが可胜になる。その結果、䟋えば、サブフレヌムずサブフレヌムずの間での衝突が回避される。 For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may increase the TA for UL transmission in the UL band by the predetermined time in accordance with the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. And instructing the TA. This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200. Thereby, for example, the UL reception timing for the UL band can be advanced by a predetermined time in accordance with the switching. As a result, for example, collision between the UL subframe and the DL subframe is avoided.

 コマンドの通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘切替えのサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌムにおけるコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘に぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。䟋えば、圓該コマンドは、䞊蚘垯域における送信の䞊蚘を䞊蚘所定時間だけ長くする倀を瀺す。これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘切替えのタむミングで、䞊蚘を䞊蚘所定時間だけ長くするこずが可胜になる。
(A-1) Notification of TA Command For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by the notification of the TA command in the subframe six subframes before the switching. For example, the TA command indicates a value (T A ) that makes the TA for UL transmission in the UL band longer by the predetermined time. Thereby, for example, the TA can be lengthened by the predetermined time at the switching timing.

 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信のを瀺す情報䟋えば、を生成する。 For example, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates information (for example, N TA ) indicating the UL transmission TA in the UL band based on the TA command.

 なお、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えの前には、䞊蚘垯域における送信のが䞊蚘所定時間だけ短くなるように、圓該に぀いおの指瀺を行う。䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘切替えのサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌムにおけるコマンドの通知により、䞊蚘に぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。 For example, before switching the operation mode from the second mode to the first mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines that the TA for UL transmission in the UL band is the predetermined time. An instruction for the TA is given to shorten the time. For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.

 オフセットの通知
 基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘所定時間に察応するオフセットを瀺す情報以䞋、「オフセット情報」ず呌ぶの通知により、䞊蚘に぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行っおもよい。
(A-2) Notification of offset The base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the instruction for the TA by notification of information indicating the offset corresponding to the predetermined time (hereinafter referred to as “offset information”). May be.

 端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘オフセット情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信のを瀺す情報䟋えば、を生成しおもよい。 The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) may generate information indicating the TA of UL transmission in the UL band (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information.

  具䜓的な䟋
 具䜓的には、基地局制埡郚は、䟋えば、システム情報の䞭で、又はシグナリングにより、オフセット情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。端末装眮は、ずずから、新たなを算出しおもよい。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘を瀺す情報であるを新たに生成しおもよい。なお、は、所定倀䟋えば、であっおもよい。
Specific Example Specifically, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the offset information NTA_offset (for example, in the system information or by signaling). Terminal device 200, and an N TA and N TA_offset, may calculate a new N TA. That is, the terminal device 200 may newly generate NTA that is information indicating the TA. Note that NTA_offset may be a predetermined value (for example, 624).

  オフセットの䜿甚の手法動䜜モヌドの切替えの際の䜿甚
 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域の䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドに切り替わる際に、䞊蚘オフセット情報に基づいお、䞊蚘を瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、を生成しおもよい。その埌、端末装眮は、コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘を瀺す䞊蚘情報䟋えば、を生成曎新しおもよい。
-Method of using offset (use when switching operation mode)
The terminal device 200 generates the information indicating the TA (for example, N TA ) based on the offset information when the operation mode of the UL band is switched from the first mode to the second mode. May be. Thereafter, the terminal device 200 may generate (update) the information (for example, N TA ) indicating the TA based on the TA command.

  通知の䟋
 基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘オフセット情報の通知を行っおもよい。あるいは、基地局制埡郚は、個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘オフセット情報の通知を行っおもよい。圓該個別のシグナリングは、シグナリングであっおもよい。
-Notification example The base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the offset information in the system information. Alternatively, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the offset information by individual signaling. The individual signaling may be RRC signaling.

  その他
 基地局が䞊蚘オフセット情報䟋えば、を端末装眮に通知する代わりに、䞊蚘オフセット情報が端末装眮においお予め蚘憶されおいおもよい。
-Others Instead of the base station 100 notifying the terminal device 200 of the offset information (for example, N TA_offset ), the offset information may be stored in the terminal device 200 in advance.

 第の䟋
 䞊述したように、第の䟋ずしお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングは、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであるか䞊蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングよりも䞊蚘所定時間だけ早くおもよい。
(B) Second Example As described above, as a second example, the UL reception timing for the UL band depends on whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Instead, it may be earlier than the DL transmission timing for the DL band by the predetermined time.

 この堎合に、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの䞊蚘切替えの有無によらず、通垞通り、䞊蚘垯域における送信のに぀いおの指瀺を行っおもよい。䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、通垞通り、コマンドの通知により、䞊蚘に぀いおの指瀺を行っおもよい。 In this case, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may instruct the UL transmission TA in the UL band as usual, regardless of whether or not the operation mode is switched. For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) may instruct the TA as usual by notifying the TA command.

 端末装眮の動䜜
 䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、受信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域における送信のずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、䞊蚘受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングである。䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合には、䞊蚘受信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングであっおもよく、又は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングであっおもよい。
(C) Operation of Terminal Device 200 For example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing and the TA for UL transmission in the UL band. When the operation mode is the first mode, the DL reception timing is a DL reception timing for the DL band. When the operation mode is the second mode, the DL reception timing may be a DL reception timing for the DL band or a DL reception timing for the UL band. .

 その他
 アップリンク垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションの通知
 コンフィギュレヌションに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(5) Others (a) UL / DL configuration notification for uplink bandwidth The description of the UL / DL configuration is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス手続
 䟋えば、端末装眮は、アむドル状態から接続状態ぞの遷移のために、ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域においおランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信する。
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.

 䟋えば、基地局は、ランダムアクセス応答を端末装眮ぞ送信する。この際に、基地局は、コマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 For example, the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.

 同期信号
 䟋えば、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであっおも、䞊蚘垯域においお同期信号は送信されない。即ち、基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであっおも、䞊蚘垯域においお同期信号を送信しない。䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングは、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず同期しおいるからである。これにより、䟋えば、無線リ゜ヌスが節玄される。
(C) Synchronization signal For example, even if the operation mode is the second mode, a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the UL band. That is, the base station 100 does not transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band even when the operation mode is the second mode. This is because the DL transmission timing for the UL band is synchronized with the DL transmission timing for the DL band. Thereby, for example, radio resources are saved.

 あるいは、基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域においお同期信号を送信しおもよい。 Alternatively, the base station 100 may transmit a synchronization signal in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode.

 スケゞュヌリング
 スケヌリングに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ケむパビリティ情報の通知
 ケむパビリティ情報の通知に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the third embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 凊理の流れ
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の䟋を説明する。図は、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。なお、圓該凊理の説明においお、の垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは、最初に、第のモヌドになっおいるものずする。
<6.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of processing according to the third embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.

 基地局は、のためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA (S361).

 端末装眮は、の垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、の垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the FDD UL band based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band and the information indicating the TA (S363). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S365). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 基地局は、モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該モヌド切替え情報は、第のモヌドず第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報である。ずりわけ、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドであり、䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されるモヌドである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S367). The mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. The first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL, and the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの䞊蚘切替えの前に、のためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘切替えのサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌムにおいお、䞊蚘コマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA before the switching of the operation mode (S369). For example, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the TA command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞ切り替える。たた、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングずを同期させる。 The base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S371). Further, the base station 100 synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the DL band and the DL transmission timing for the UL band (S373).

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域又は䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band or the UL band and the information indicating the TA (S375). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S377). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 以䞊、第の実斜圢態を説明した。第の実斜圢態によれば、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。 The third embodiment has been described above. According to the third embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミング、及び䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングのいずれに基づいおも、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを適切に調敎するこずができる。そのため、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟される。その結果、䞊蚘垯域においおより良奜に無線通信が行われ埗る。たた、端末装眮のためのの数が増えないので、シグナリングのオヌバヌヘッドの増加が抑えられ埗る。 More specifically, for example, the terminal device 200 appropriately adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on either the DL reception timing for the DL band or the DL reception timing for the UL band. can do. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.

 第の実斜圢態
 続いお、図を参照しお、本開瀺の第の実斜圢態を説明する。
<< 7. Fourth Embodiment >>
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIG.

 技術的課題
 第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題は、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
<7.1. Technical issues>
The technical problem according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the technical problem according to the first embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 技術的特城
 次に、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的特城を説明する。
<7.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the fourth embodiment will be described.

 動䜜モヌドの切替え
 基地局切替郚は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.

 動䜜モヌドの切替えに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。 There is no difference between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment regarding the switching of the operation mode. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺
 第の実斜圢態では、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであるか又は䞊蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするに぀いおの指瀺を行う。圓該指瀺は、端末装眮ぞの指瀺である。なお、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするに぀いおの指瀺を行わない。
(2) Instruction about timing advance In the fourth embodiment, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. The TA is instructed based on the DL reception timing for the FDD DL band corresponding to the UL band. This instruction is an instruction to the terminal device 200. Note that the base station 100 (the control unit 153) does not give an instruction about TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.

 䞀方、ずりわけ第の実斜圢態では、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであるか又は䞊蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 On the other hand, particularly in the fourth embodiment, the terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted based on the DL reception timing.

 具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする䞊蚘のためのコマンドの通知により、圓該に぀いおの䞊蚘指瀺を行う。端末装眮情報取埗郚は、䞊蚘コマンドを取埗する。そしお、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。なお、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘コマンドに基づいお、䞊蚘を瀺す䞊蚘情報を生成する。 Specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) gives the above instruction for the TA by notifying the TA command for the TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band. The terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the TA command. And the terminal device 200 (control part 243) adjusts UL transmission timing about the said UL band based on the DL reception timing about the said DL band, and the information which shows said TA. The terminal device 200 (the control unit 243) generates the information indicating the TA based on the TA command.

 図を再び参照するず、䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドによらず、垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするのためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドによらず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域における送信タむミングを調敎する。 Referring to FIG. 11 again, for example, the base station 100 sends a TA command for TA43 (TA based on DL reception timing for the DL band) to the terminal apparatus 200 regardless of the operation mode for the UL band. Notice. The terminal device 200 (control unit 243) adjusts the UL transmission timing in the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA 43, regardless of the operation mode for the UL band. .

 その他
 アップリンク垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションの通知
 コンフィギュレヌションに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(3) Others (a) UL / DL configuration notification for uplink bandwidth The description of the UL / DL configuration is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域
 ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(B) Random access (b-1) Random access time frequency region The description of the random access time frequency region is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ランダムアクセス手続
 䟋えば、端末装眮は、アむドル状態から接続状態ぞの遷移のために、ランダムアクセス時間呚波数領域においおランダムアクセスプリアンブルを送信する。
(B-2) Random access procedure For example, the terminal device 200 transmits a random access preamble in the random access time frequency domain for the transition from the idle state to the connected state.

 䟋えば、基地局は、ランダムアクセス応答を端末装眮ぞ送信する。この際に、基地局は、コマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 For example, the base station 100 transmits a random access response to the terminal device 200. At this time, the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command.

 同期信号
 同期信号の送信に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 スケゞュヌリング
 スケヌリングに぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(D) Scheduling Scaling is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ケむパビリティ情報の通知
 ケむパビリティ情報の通知に぀いおの説明は、第の実斜圢態ず第の実斜圢態ずの間に差異はない。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the notification of capability information is not different between the first embodiment and the fourth embodiment. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 凊理の流れ
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の䟋を説明する。図は、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。なお、圓該凊理の説明においお、の垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは、最初に、第のモヌドになっおいるものずする。
<7.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fourth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.

 基地局は、の垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするのためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD (S381).

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、の垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band of the FDD based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S383). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S385). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 基地局は、モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該モヌド切替え情報は、第のモヌドず第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報である。ずりわけ、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドであり、䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されるモヌドである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S387). The mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. The first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL, and the second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division.

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞ切り替える。 The base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S389).

 基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずするのためのコマンドを端末装眮に通知する。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of a TA command for TA based on the DL reception timing for the DL band (S391).

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングず、䞊蚘を瀺す情報ずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そしお、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域における送信を行う。即ち、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお信号を送信する。 The terminal device 200 adjusts the UL transmission timing for the UL band based on the DL reception timing for the DL band and the information indicating the TA (S393). Then, the terminal device 200 performs UL transmission in the UL band (S395). That is, the terminal device 200 transmits a UL signal in the UL band.

 以䞊、第の実斜圢態を説明した。第の実斜圢態によれば、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。 The fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fourth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであるか䞊蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。そのため、䞊蚘垯域が時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合でも、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟される。その結果、䞊蚘垯域においおより良奜に無線通信が行われ埗る。たた、端末装眮のためのの数が増えないので、シグナリングのオヌバヌヘッドの増加が抑えられ埗る。 More specifically, for example, the terminal device 200 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band, regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted. Therefore, even when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station 100 is realized. As a result, better wireless communication can be performed in the UL band. Moreover, since the number of TAs for the terminal device 200 does not increase, an increase in signaling overhead can be suppressed.

 第の実斜圢態
 続いお、図図を参照しお、本開瀺の第の実斜圢態を説明する。
<< 8. Fifth embodiment >>
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment of the present disclosure will be described with reference to FIGS.

 技術的課題
 たず、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的課題を説明する。
<8.1. Technical issues>
First, a technical problem according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

 の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する手法が怜蚎されおいる。圓該手法は、フレキシブルデュプレクスず呌ばれ埗る。 A method of using the FDD UL band for both DL and UL in a time division manner is being studied. This approach can be referred to as flexible duplex.

 しかし、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合には、圓該垯域においお無線通信が良奜に行われない可胜性がある。 However, when the FDD UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication may not be performed well in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、デヌタが、の垯域においお、あるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、の垯域においお、圓該あるサブフレヌムのサブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌムで送信される。しかし、䞊蚘垯域が、時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚される堎合には、䞊蚘あるサブフレヌムのサブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌムは、サブフレヌムであり埗る。そのため、端末装眮は、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおの䞊蚘を送信するこずができなくなり埗る。あるいは、䞊蚘垯域においおデヌタが送信されるサブフレヌムが、サブフレヌムのサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌムにのみに限定され埗る。以䞋、この点に぀いお、図を参照しお具䜓䟋を説明する。 More specifically, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a certain subframe in the FDD DL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in four subframes of the certain subframe in the FDD UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe after the frame. However, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in time division, a subframe after four subframes of the certain subframe may be a DL subframe. Therefore, the terminal device may not be able to transmit the ACK / NACK for the DL data. Alternatively, the subframe in which DL data is transmitted in the DL band may be limited to a subframe that is four subframes before the UL subframe. Hereinafter, a specific example of this point will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、デヌタに぀いおのが送信されるサブフレヌムがサブフレヌムである䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域のサブフレヌムず、の垯域のサブフレヌムずが瀺されおいる。この䟋では、圓該垯域は時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおいる。䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、通垞、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。しかし、䞊蚘垯域は、時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおおり、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムは、サブフレヌムであるので、端末装眮は、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信するこずができない。あるいは、基地局は、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで䞊蚘デヌタを送信するこずができない。同様に、䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、通垞、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。しかし、䞊蚘垯域は、時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおおり、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムは、サブフレヌムであるので、䞊蚘端末装眮は、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信するこずができない。あるいは、䞊蚘基地局は、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで䞊蚘デヌタを送信するこずができない。 FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example in which a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted is a DL subframe. Referring to FIG. 19, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 0 in the DL band, an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number of 4 in the UL band. Sent in subframe. However, the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 4 is a DL subframe. NACK cannot be transmitted. Alternatively, the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 0. Similarly, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 1 in the DL band, an ACK / NACK for the DL data usually has a subframe number in the UL band. 5 is transmitted in a subframe. However, since the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, and the subframe having a subframe number of 5 is a DL subframe, the terminal apparatus transmits an ACK for the DL data. / NACK cannot be transmitted. Alternatively, the base station cannot transmit the DL data in a subframe whose subframe number is 1.

 そこで、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずを可胜にする仕組みが提䟛されるこずが望たしい。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを適切に送信するこずを可胜にする仕組みが提䟛されるこずが望たしい。 Therefore, it is desirable to provide a mechanism that enables better wireless communication in the UL band when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner. More specifically, for example, when a UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, a mechanism that enables appropriate transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data is provided. desirable.

 技術的特城
 次に、図図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る技術的特城を説明する。
<8.2. Technical features>
Next, technical features according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

 動䜜モヌドの切替え
 基地局切替郚は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える。
(1) Switching of operation mode The base station 100 (switching unit 151) includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL and the UL band in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The operation mode for the UL band is switched between the two modes.

 第の実斜圢態における動䜜モヌドの切替えに぀いおの説明は、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおける動䜜モヌドの切替えに぀いおの説明ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。 The description of the operation mode switching in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the operation mode switching in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 コンフィギュレヌション
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、コンフィギュレヌションに埓っお䞊蚘垯域における無線通信を行う。
(2) UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, the base station 100 (control unit 153) performs radio transmission in the UL band according to the UL / DL configuration. Communicate.

 コンフィギュレヌションの䟋
 䟋えば、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、のコンフィギュレヌションである。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションのいずれかである。
(A) Example of UL / DL Configuration For example, the UL / DL configuration is a UL / DL configuration of TDD. More specifically, for example, the UL / DL configuration is one of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG.

 なお、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションは、のコンフィギュレヌションではなく、別のコンフィギュレヌション䟋えば、に固有のコンフィギュレヌションであっおもよい。 Note that the UL / DL configuration described above may be a different configuration (for example, a configuration unique to FDD) instead of the TDD UL / DL configuration.

 コンフィギュレヌションの倉曎
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎する。基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションを動的にdynamically倉曎しおもよく、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌションを準静的にsemi-statically倉曎しおもよく、
(C) Change of UL / DL configuration For example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a plurality of UL / DL configurations. Change in UL / DL configuration candidates. The base station 100 (control unit 153) may dynamically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, and semi-statically change the UL / DL configuration for the UL band. (Semi-statically)

 耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補
 䟋えば、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、の耇数のコンフィギュレヌションである。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションのうちの぀以䞊である。䞀䟋ずしお、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌション、、、である。
(C-1) Multiple UL / DL Configuration Candidates For example, the multiple UL / DL configuration candidates are a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD. More specifically, for example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. As an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG.

 なお、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、の耇数のコンフィギュレヌションではなく、別の耇数のコンフィギュレヌション䟋えば、に固有の耇数のコンフィギュレヌションであっおもよい。 It should be noted that the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates may be a plurality of different configurations (for example, a plurality of configurations unique to FDD) instead of a plurality of UL / DL configurations of TDD.

 倉曎の手法
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、セルにおけるのトラフィックずのトラフィックずに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを倉曎する。より具䜓的には、䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを、サブフレヌムずサブフレヌムずのより適切な比率を有するコンフィギュレヌションに倉曎する。
(C-2) Changing Method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band based on the DL traffic and the UL traffic in the cell 101. More specifically, for example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band to a UL / DL configuration having a more appropriate ratio of DL subframes to UL subframes. Change to

 䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションの倉曎により、䟋えば、リ゜ヌスの量ずリ゜ヌスの量ずをより柔軟に調敎するこずが可胜になる。 -By changing the UL / DL configuration for the UL band, for example, the amount of DL resources and the amount of UL resources can be adjusted more flexibly.

 コンフィギュレヌションの通知
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報以䞋、「コンフィギュレヌション情報」ず呌ぶを端末装眮に通知する。
(D) UL / DL configuration notification For example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits information indicating the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (hereinafter referred to as “configuration information”) to the terminal device 200. Notify

 䞀䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報を端末装眮に通知する。䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報は、新たな情報ずしおシステム情報の䞭に含たれおもよい。あるいは、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報は、䞊蚘垯域においおサブフレヌムで送信されるシステム情報の䞭に、のコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報ずしお含たれおもよい。 As an example, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information in the system information. The configuration information may be included in the system information as new information. Alternatively, the configuration information may be included as information indicating the TDD UL / DL configuration in the system information transmitted in the DL subframe in the UL band.

 別の䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮ぞの個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘コンフィギュレヌション情報を端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、圓該個別のシグナリングは、シグナリングである。 As another example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the configuration information by individual signaling to the terminal device 200. For example, the individual signaling is RRC signaling.

 サブフレヌム関連情報の通知
 ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌム
 ずりわけ第の実斜圢態では、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報以䞋、「サブフレヌム関連情報」ず呌ぶを、端末装眮に通知する。
(3) Notification of ACK / NACK subframe related information (a) Subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data In particular, in the fifth embodiment, the base station 100 (control unit 153) has the above operation mode In the second mode, the terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data (hereinafter referred to as “DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information”).

 䞀方、端末装眮情報取埗郚は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を取埗する。さらに、端末装眮は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信する。端末装眮の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行う。 Meanwhile, the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Furthermore, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. When the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.

 これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを適切に送信するこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data.

 デヌタ
  垯域においお送信されるデヌタ
 䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタは、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域においお送信されるデヌタを含む。即ち、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報である。たた、端末装眮の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信する。
(A-1) DL data-DL data transmitted in the DL band For example, the DL data includes DL data transmitted in the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK is transmitted for DL data transmitted in the DL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the DL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.

 これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを適切に送信するこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band.

  垯域においお送信されるデヌタ
 䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタは、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタをさらに含む。即ち、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報でもある。たた、端末装眮の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信する。
-DL data transmitted in the UL band For example, the DL data further includes DL data transmitted in the UL band. That is, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band. In addition, when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 determines DL data transmitted in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. ACK / NACK is transmitted in the UL band.

 これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのも適切に送信するこずが可胜になる。 Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to appropriately transmit ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band.

 サブフレヌム
 䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のサブフレヌムである。これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションが䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎されたずしおも、デヌタに぀いおのを確実に送信するこずが可胜になる。䟋えば、端末装眮が倉曎埌のコンフィギュレヌションを知る前に、圓該倉曎埌のコンフィギュレヌションが適甚されたずしおも、端末装眮は、デヌタに぀いおのをサブフレヌムで送信するこずができる。
(A-2) Subframe For example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is a UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. Thereby, for example, even if the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is changed among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates, it is possible to reliably transmit ACK / NACK for DL data. Become. For example, even if the changed UL / DL configuration is applied before the terminal device 200 knows the changed UL / DL configuration, the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL sub Can be sent in frames.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムである。このような堎合に、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションず呌ばれ埗る。以䞋、図を参照しお、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムの䟋を説明する。 More specifically, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is for the first UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data. In such a case, the first UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a DL reference UL / DL configuration. Hereinafter, an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data) defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩された、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムが瀺されおいる。このテヌブルは、  に含たれる ず同じものである。䟋えば、コンフィギュレヌションのためには、サブフレヌム番号が、であるサブフレヌムが、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムずしお定矩されおいる。より具䜓的には、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムでは、圓該サブフレヌムよりもサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されたデヌタに぀いおのが送信される。たた、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムでは、圓該サブフレヌムよりもサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されたデヌタに぀いおのが送信される。 FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of subframes defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 20, a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data, defined for DL reference UL / DL configuration, is shown. This table is the same as Table 10.1.3A-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213. For example, for configuration 4, subframes with subframe numbers 2 and 3 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data. More specifically, in a subframe having a subframe number of 2, it was transmitted in a subframe that is 7 to 12 subframes before the subframe (that is, a subframe having a subframe number of 0 to 5). ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted. Further, in the subframe having the subframe number 3, the DL data transmitted in the subframe 4 to 7 subframes before the subframe (that is, the subframe having the subframe number 6 to 9) is transmitted. ACK / NACK is transmitted.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、サブフレヌムの数が最小であるコンフィギュレヌション候補である。䞀䟋ずしお、䞊述したように、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌション、、、である。この堎合に、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションである。さらに、この堎合に、デヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムは、図に瀺されるように、サブフレヌム番号が、であるサブフレヌムである。以䞋、図及び図を参照しお、デヌタに぀いおのの送信の䟋を説明する。 For example, the first UL / DL configuration candidate is a UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of UL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. As an example, as described above, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG. In this case, the first UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 4 shown in FIG. Further, in this case, subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for DL data are subframes having subframe numbers 2 and 3, as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

 図は、垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域のサブフレヌムず、の垯域のサブフレヌムずが瀺されおいる。この䟋では、圓該垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは第のモヌドであり、圓該垯域は時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおいる。たた、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションは、コンフィギュレヌションである。䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がのいずれかであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。たた、䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がのいずれかであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。 FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the DL band. Referring to FIG. 21, a subframe of the FDD DL band and a subframe of the FDD UL band are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 0 to 5 in the DL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data has a subframe number in the UL band. 2 is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe). Also, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 6 to 9 in the DL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band in the subband. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.

 図は、垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域のサブフレヌムず、の垯域のサブフレヌムずが瀺されおいる。この䟋では、圓該垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは第のモヌドであり、圓該垯域は時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおいる。たた、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションは、コンフィギュレヌションである。䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号が、、、のいずれかであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。たた、䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がのいずれかであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。 FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for DL data transmitted in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 22, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4. For example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is 0, 1, 4, or 5 in the UL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is transmitted in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose subframe number is 2. Also, for example, when DL data is transmitted in a subframe whose subframe number is any of 6 to 9 in the UL band, ACK / NACK for the DL data is subframed in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (UL subframe) whose number is 3.

 なお、圓然ながら、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、この䟋に限られない。䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通の任意のサブフレヌムであっおもよい。 Of course, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the DL data) is not limited to this example. For example, the subframe may be an arbitrary UL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.

 このように、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのサブフレヌムによらず、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信する。 Thus, for example, the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for DL data to the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band. Send in.

 サブフレヌム関連情報
 䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報以䞋、「リファレンスコンフィギュレヌション情報」ず呌ぶである。
(A-3) DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information For example, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the first UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as “DL reference UL / DL”). Called configuration information).

 䞊述したように、䞀䟋ずしお、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションのうちの぀以䞊であり、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、むンデックスのいずれかである。 As described above, as an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.

 なお、圓然ながら、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘リファレンスコンフィギュレヌション情報に限られず、他の情報であっおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムを瀺す情報であっおもよい。具䜓的には、図に瀺されるテヌブルのいずれかの行に盞圓する情報であっおもよい。 Of course, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the DL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information. As an example, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.

 通知手法
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。䞀䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮の状態がアむドル状態から接続状態ぞ遷移する際に、䞊蚘個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、䞊蚘個別のシグナリングは、シグナリングである。
(A-4) Notification method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information by individual signaling. As an example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling when the state of the terminal device 200 transitions from the idle state to the connected state. Notify For example, the individual signaling is RRC signaling.

 なお、基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。圓該システム情報は、䞊蚘垯域で送信されるシステム情報であっおもよく、䞊蚘垯域で送信されるシステム情報であっおもよい。 Note that the base station 100 (control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information. The system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.

 アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌム
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報以䞋、「サブフレヌム関連情報」ず呌ぶを、端末装眮に通知する。
(B) Subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) transmits ACK / NACK for UL data when the operation mode is the second mode. The terminal apparatus 200 is notified of information related to the subframe to be transmitted (hereinafter referred to as “UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information”).

 䞀方、䟋えば、端末装眮情報取埗郚は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を取埗する。さらに、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお受信する。端末装眮の制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのの受信のための凊理を行う。 On the other hand, for example, the terminal device (information acquisition unit 241) acquires the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. Further, for example, when the operation mode is the second mode, the terminal device 200 receives ACK / NACK for UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. To do. When the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit 243 of the terminal device 200 performs processing for receiving ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information. I do.

 これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを適切に受信するこずが可胜になる。 Thus, for example, when the UL band is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, it becomes possible to appropriately receive ACK / NACK for UL data.

 アップリンクデヌタ
 䞊蚘アップリンクデヌタは、䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるデヌタである。
(B-1) Uplink data The uplink data is UL data transmitted in the UL band.

 サブフレヌム
 䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のサブフレヌムである。䟋えば、圓該サブフレヌムは、玔粋なサブフレヌムのみではなく、スペシャルサブフレヌムも含む。これにより、䟋えば、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションが䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎されたずしおも、デヌタに぀いおのを確実に受信するこずが可胜になる。䟋えば、端末装眮が倉曎埌のコンフィギュレヌションを知る前に、圓該倉曎埌のコンフィギュレヌションが適甚されたずしおも、端末装眮は、デヌタに぀いおのをサブフレヌムで受信するこずができる。
(B-2) Subframe For example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. Thereby, for example, even if the UL / DL configuration for the UL band is changed among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates, it is possible to reliably receive ACK / NACK for UL data. Become. For example, even if the changed UL / DL configuration is applied before the terminal device 200 knows the changed UL / DL configuration, the terminal device 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data to the DL sub Can be received in frames.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムである。このような堎合に、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションず呌ばれ埗る。以䞋、図を参照しお、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムの䟋を説明する。
 図は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩されたサブフレヌムの䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションのために定矩された、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムが瀺されおいる。このテヌブルは、  に含たれる ず同じものである。䟋えば、コンフィギュレヌションでは、デヌタが、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、サブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。たた、コンフィギュレヌションでは、デヌタが、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、サブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信される。同様に、デヌタが、サブフレヌム番号が、、、であるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、それぞれ、、、サブフレヌム埌のサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌム番号が、、、であるサブフレヌムで送信される。このように、コンフィギュレヌションのためには、サブフレヌム番号が、、、であるサブフレヌムが、デヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムずしお定矩されおいる。
More specifically, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is for a second UL / DL configuration candidate among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. It is a defined subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data. In such a case, the second UL / DL configuration candidate may be referred to as a UL reference UL / DL configuration. Hereinafter, an example of subframes (subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data) defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for describing an example of subframes defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. Referring to FIG. 23, there is shown a subframe for transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data, defined for UL reference UL / DL configuration. This table is the same as Table 9.1.2-1 included in 3GPP TS 36.213. For example, in the configuration 0, when UL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number 2, an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 4 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 6). In the configuration 0, when UL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number 3, an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe after 7 subframes (that is, the subframe number is 0). Similarly, when UL data is transmitted in subframes whose subframe numbers are 4, 7, 8, and 9, ACK / NACK for the UL data is after 6, 4, 7, and 6 subframes, respectively. (Ie, subframes with subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 5). Thus, for configuration 0, subframes with subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6 are defined as subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data.

 䟋えば、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、サブフレヌムの数が最小であるコンフィギュレヌション候補である。䟋えば、圓該サブフレヌムは、玔粋なサブフレヌムのみではなく、スペシャルサブフレヌムも含む。䞀䟋ずしお、䞊述したように、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌション、、、である。この堎合に、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションである。さらに、この堎合に、デヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムは、図に瀺されるように、サブフレヌム番号が、、、であるサブフレヌムである。以䞋、図を参照しお、デヌタに぀いおのの送信の䟋を説明する。 For example, the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the UL / DL configuration candidate having the smallest number of DL subframes among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. As an example, as described above, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are the configurations 0, 1, 3, and 4 shown in FIG. In this case, the second UL / DL configuration candidate is the configuration 0 shown in FIG. Further, in this case, subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for UL data are subframes having subframe numbers 0, 1, 5, and 6, as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data will be described with reference to FIG.

 図は、垯域においお送信されるデヌタに぀いおのの送信の䞀䟋を説明するための説明図である。図を参照するず、の垯域のサブフレヌムず、の垯域のサブフレヌムずが瀺されおいる。この䟋では、圓該垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは第のモヌドであり、圓該垯域は時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されおいる。たた、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションは、コンフィギュレヌションである。䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。たた、䟋えば、デヌタが、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムで送信されるず、圓該デヌタに぀いおのは、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌム番号がであるサブフレヌムサブフレヌムで送信される。 FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of transmission of ACK / NACK for UL data transmitted in the UL band. Referring to FIG. 24, an FDD DL band subframe and an FDD UL band subframe are shown. In this example, the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. The UL / DL configuration for the UL band is configuration 4. For example, when UL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 2 in the UL band, an ACK / NACK for the UL data is a subframe having a subframe number of 6 in the UL band. (DL subframe). Further, for example, when UL data is transmitted in a subframe having a subframe number of 3 in the UL band, ACK / NACK for the UL data has a subframe number of 0 in the UL band. It is transmitted in a subframe (DL subframe).

 なお、圓然ながら、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、この䟋に限られない。䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通の任意のサブフレヌムであっおもよい。 Of course, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is not limited to this example. For example, the subframe may be any DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates.

 このように、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのサブフレヌムによらず、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、デヌタに぀いおのを䞊蚘垯域においお送信する。 Thus, for example, the terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for UL data based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information, regardless of the UL / DL subframe for the UL band, to the UL band. Send in.

 サブフレヌム関連情報
 䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘第のコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報以䞋、「リファレンスコンフィギュレヌション情報」ず呌ぶである。
(B-3) UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information For example, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information includes information indicating the second UL / DL configuration candidate (hereinafter referred to as “UL reference UL / DL”). Called configuration information).

 䞊述したように、䞀䟋ずしお、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補は、図に瀺されるコンフィギュレヌションのうちの぀以䞊であり、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、むンデックスのいずれかである。 As described above, as an example, the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates are two or more of the configurations 0 to 6 shown in FIG. 4, and the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is: One of indexes 0 to 6.

 なお、圓然ながら、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘リファレンスコンフィギュレヌション情報に限られず、他の情報であっおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムを瀺す情報であっおもよい。具䜓的には、図に瀺されるテヌブルのいずれかの行に盞圓する情報であっおもよい。 Of course, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is not limited to the UL reference UL / DL configuration information, and may be other information. For example, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information may be information indicating a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. Specifically, it may be information corresponding to any row of the table shown in FIG.

 通知手法
 䟋えば、基地局制埡郚は、個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。䞀䟋ずしお、基地局制埡郚は、端末装眮の状態がアむドル状態から接続状態ぞ遷移する際に、䞊蚘個別のシグナリングにより、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。䟋えば、䞊蚘個別のシグナリングは、シグナリングである。
(B-4) Notification Method For example, the base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information by individual signaling. As an example, when the state of the terminal device 200 transitions from the idle state to the connected state, the base station 100 (the control unit 153) transmits the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information to the terminal device 200 by the individual signaling. Notify For example, the individual signaling is RRC signaling.

 なお、基地局制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知しおもよい。圓該システム情報は、䞊蚘垯域で送信されるシステム情報であっおもよく、䞊蚘垯域で送信されるシステム情報であっおもよい。 Note that the base station 100 (the control unit 153) may notify the terminal device 200 of the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information in the system information. The system information may be system information transmitted in the UL band, or may be system information transmitted in the DL band.

 その他
 枬定measurements
 䞊述したように、䟋えば、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムは、䞊蚘耇数のコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のサブフレヌムである。䟋えば、圓該サブフレヌムは、玔粋なサブフレヌムのみではなく、スペシャルサブフレヌムも含む。この堎合に、䟋えば、端末装眮制埡郚は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの枬定を制埡する。
(4) Others (a) Measurements
As described above, for example, the subframe (transmitting ACK / NACK for the UL data) is a DL subframe that is common among the plurality of UL / DL configuration candidates. For example, the DL subframe includes not only a pure DL subframe but also a special subframe. In this case, for example, the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) controls the measurement for the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.

 具䜓的には、䟋えば、端末装眮は、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを送信する䞊蚘サブフレヌムで䞊蚘垯域においお送信されるリファレンス信号に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの枬定を行う。䟋えば、䞊蚘リファレンス信号は、Cell-specific Reference Signalであり、䞊蚘枬定は、Reference Signal Received Power及び又はReference Signal Received Qualityの枬定である。 Specifically, for example, the terminal device 200 performs measurement on the UL band based on a reference signal transmitted in the UL band in the subframe (transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data). . For example, the reference signal is CRS (Cell-specific Reference Signal), and the measurement is RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) and / or RSRQ (Reference Signal Received Quality).

 これにより、䟋えば、端末装眮は、リファレンス信号が確実に送信されるサブフレヌム即ち、サブフレヌムを察象ずしお枬定を行うこずが可胜になる。そのため、䟋えば、枬定の誀りが回避される。 Thereby, for example, the terminal device 200 can perform measurement on a subframe (that is, DL subframe) in which the reference signal is reliably transmitted. Thus, for example, measurement errors are avoided.

 ランダムアクセス
 第の実斜圢態におけるランダムアクセスに぀いおの説明は、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおけるランダムアクセスに぀いおの説明ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(B) Random access The description of random access in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of random access in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 同期信号
 第の実斜圢態における同期信号の送信に぀いおの説明は、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおける同期信号の送信に぀いおの説明ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(C) Synchronization signal The description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the transmission of the synchronization signal in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 スケゞュヌリング
 第の実斜圢態におけるスケゞュヌリングに぀いおの説明は、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおけるスケゞュヌリングに぀いおの説明ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(D) Scheduling The description of scheduling in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of scheduling in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 ケむパビリティ情報の通知
 第の実斜圢態におけるケむパビリティ情報の通知に぀いおの説明は、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおけるケむパビリティ情報の通知に぀いおの説明ず同じである。よっお、ここでは重耇する蚘茉を省略する。
(E) Notification of capability information The description of the capability information notification in the fifth embodiment is the same as the description of the capability information notification in any of the first to fourth embodiments. Therefore, the overlapping description is omitted here.

 凊理の流れ
 次に、図を参照しお、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の䟋を説明する。図は、第の実斜圢態に係る凊理の抂略的な流れの䞀䟋を瀺すシヌケンス図である。なお、圓該凊理の説明においお、の垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドは、最初に、第のモヌドになっおいるものずする。
<8.3. Flow of processing>
Next, an example of processing according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a sequence diagram illustrating an example of a schematic flow of a process according to the fifth embodiment. In the description of the processing, it is assumed that the operation mode for the UL band of the FDD is first the first mode.

 基地局制埡郚は、サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該サブフレヌム関連情報は、の垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドが第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報である。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚されるモヌドである。䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報である。 The base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal apparatus 200 of DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S401). The DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information on a subframe in which ACK / NACK for DL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band of FDD is the second mode. The second mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. For example, the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a DL reference UL / DL configuration.

 基地局制埡郚は、サブフレヌム関連情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該サブフレヌム関連情報は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドが第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報である。䟋えば、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報は、リファレンスコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報である。 The base station 100 (control unit 153) notifies the terminal device 200 of UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S403). The UL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information is information regarding a subframe in which ACK / NACK for UL data is transmitted when the operation mode for the UL band is the second mode. For example, the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information is information indicating a UL reference UL / DL configuration.

 基地局は、モヌド切替え情報を端末装眮に通知する。圓該モヌド切替え情報は、第のモヌドず䞊蚘第のモヌドずの間での䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報である。ずりわけ、䞊蚘モヌド切替え情報は、䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞの䞊蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す。䞊蚘第のモヌドは、䞊蚘垯域がに䜿甚されるモヌドである。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the mode switching information (S405). The mode switching information is information indicating switching of the operation mode for the UL band between the first mode and the second mode. In particular, the mode switching information indicates switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. The first mode is a mode in which the UL band is used for UL.

 基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを端末装眮に通知する。 The base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S407).

 基地局は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドを䞊蚘第のモヌドから䞊蚘第のモヌドぞ切り替える。 The base station 100 switches the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode (S409).

 基地局は、デヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌムでデヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。あるいは、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、デヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。するず、端末装眮は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを基地局ぞ送信する。 The base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S411). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S413).

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお、デヌタを基地局ぞ送信する。するず、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌムで、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを端末装眮ぞ送信する。端末装眮は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおの䞊蚘を受信する。 The terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S415). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S417). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.

 基地局は、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおのコンフィギュレヌションを倉曎する。 The base station 100 changes the UL / DL configuration for the UL band (S419).

 基地局は、デヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。䟋えば、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌムでデヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。あるいは、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、デヌタを端末装眮ぞ送信する。するず、端末装眮は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを基地局ぞ送信する。 The base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 (S421). For example, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in a DL subframe in the UL band. Alternatively, the base station 100 transmits DL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band. Then, terminal apparatus 200 transmits ACK / NACK for the DL data to base station 100 in the UL band based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe-related information (S423).

 端末装眮は、䞊蚘垯域においお、デヌタを基地局ぞ送信する。するず、基地局は、䞊蚘垯域においお、サブフレヌムで、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおのを端末装眮ぞ送信する。端末装眮は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘垯域においお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおの䞊蚘を受信する。 The terminal device 200 transmits UL data to the base station 100 in the UL band (S425). Then, the base station 100 transmits ACK / NACK for the UL data to the terminal device 200 in the DL band in the UL band (S427). The terminal device 200 receives the ACK / NACK for the UL data in the UL band based on the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information.

 なお、基地局は、いずれかのタむミングで、倉曎されたコンフィギュレヌションを端末装眮に通知する。端末装眮には、の送信、前に、䞊蚘倉曎されたコンフィギュレヌションが通知されおもよく、の送信、埌に、䞊蚘倉曎されたコンフィギュレヌションが通知されおもよい。いずれにせよ、端末装眮は、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおを送信するこずができ、䞊蚘サブフレヌム関連情報に基づいお、䞊蚘デヌタに぀いおの䞊蚘を受信するこずができる。 Note that the base station 100 notifies the terminal device 200 of the changed UL / DL configuration at any timing. The terminal apparatus 200 may be notified of the changed UL / DL configuration before transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427), and changed after transmission of ACK / NACK (S423, S427). The UL / DL configuration may be notified. In any case, the terminal apparatus 200 can transmit ACK / NACK for the DL data based on the DL-ACK / NACK subframe related information (S423), and the UL-ACK / NACK subframe related information. The ACK / NACK for the UL data can be received based on (S427).

 以䞊、第の実斜圢態を説明した。第の実斜圢態によれば、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。 The fourth embodiment has been described above. According to the fifth embodiment, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band.

 より具䜓的には、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合にデヌタに぀いおのが適切に送信される。たた、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合にデヌタに぀いおのが適切に送信される。 More specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted. For example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, ACK / NACK for UL data is appropriately transmitted.

 第第の実斜圢態のうちのいずれかず第の実斜圢態ずが組み合せられおもよい。具䜓的には、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおける基地局特に、制埡郚は、第の実斜圢態における基地局特に、制埡郚の動䜜を行っおもよい。たた、第第の実斜圢態のいずれかにおける端末装眮特に、制埡郚は、第の実斜圢態における端末装眮制埡郚の動䜜を行っおもよい。 Any one of the first to fourth embodiments may be combined with the fifth embodiment. Specifically, the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in any of the first to fourth embodiments performs the operation of the base station 100 (especially the control unit 153) in the fifth embodiment. Also good. Further, the terminal device 200 (especially the control unit 243) in any of the first to fourth embodiments may perform the operation of the terminal device 200 (control unit 243) in the fifth embodiment.

 応甚䟋
 本開瀺に係る技術は、様々な補品ぞ応甚可胜である。䟋えば、基地局は、マクロ又はスモヌルなどのいずれかの皮類のevolved Node Bずしお実珟されおもよい。スモヌルは、ピコ、マむクロ又はホヌムフェムトなどの、マクロセルよりも小さいセルをカバヌするであっおよい。その代わりに、基地局は、又はBase Transceiver Stationなどの他の皮類の基地局ずしお実珟されおもよい。基地局は、無線通信を制埡する本䜓基地局装眮ずもいうず、本䜓ずは別の堎所に配眮される぀以䞊のRemote Radio Headずを含んでもよい。たた、埌述する様々な皮類の端末が䞀時的に又は半氞続的に基地局機胜を実行するこずにより、基地局ずしお動䜜しおもよい。さらに、基地局の少なくずも䞀郚の構成芁玠は、基地局装眮又は基地局装眮のためのモゞュヌルにおいお実珟されおもよい。
<< 9. Application example >>
The technology according to the present disclosure can be applied to various products. For example, the base station 100 may be realized as any type of eNB (evolved Node B) such as a macro eNB or a small eNB. The small eNB may be an eNB that covers a cell smaller than a macro cell, such as a pico eNB, a micro eNB, or a home (femto) eNB. Instead, the base station 100 may be realized as another type of base station such as a NodeB or a BTS (Base Transceiver Station). Base station 100 may include a main body (also referred to as a base station apparatus) that controls radio communication, and one or more RRHs (Remote Radio Heads) that are arranged at locations different from the main body. Further, various types of terminals described later may operate as the base station 100 by temporarily or semi-permanently executing the base station function. Furthermore, at least some components of the base station 100 may be realized in a base station apparatus or a module for the base station apparatus.

 たた、䟋えば、端末装眮は、スマヌトフォン、タブレットPersonal Computer、ノヌト、携垯型ゲヌム端末、携垯型ドングル型のモバむルルヌタ若しくはデゞタルカメラなどのモバむル端末、又はカヌナビゲヌション装眮などの車茉端末ずしお実珟されおもよい。たた、端末装眮は、Machine To Machine通信を行う端末Machine Type Communication端末ずもいうずしお実珟されおもよい。さらに、端末装眮の少なくずも䞀郚の構成芁玠は、これら端末に搭茉されるモゞュヌル䟋えば、぀のダむで構成される集積回路モゞュヌルにおいお実珟されおもよい。 Further, for example, the terminal device 200 is a smartphone, a tablet PC (Personal Computer), a notebook PC, a portable game terminal, a mobile terminal such as a portable / dongle type mobile router or a digital camera, or an in-vehicle terminal such as a car navigation device. It may be realized as. The terminal device 200 may be realized as a terminal (also referred to as an MTC (Machine Type Communication) terminal) that performs M2M (Machine To Machine) communication. Furthermore, at least a part of the components of the terminal device 200 may be realized in a module (for example, an integrated circuit module configured by one die) mounted on these terminals.

 基地局に関する応甚䟋
 第の応甚䟋
 図は、本開瀺に係る技術が適甚され埗るの抂略的な構成の第の䟋を瀺すブロック図である。は、぀以䞊のアンテナ、及び基地局装眮を有する。各アンテナ及び基地局装眮は、ケヌブルを介しお互いに接続され埗る。
<9.1. Application examples for base stations>
(First application example)
FIG. 26 is a block diagram illustrating a first example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied. The eNB 800 includes one or more antennas 810 and a base station device 820. Each antenna 810 and the base station apparatus 820 can be connected to each other via an RF cable.

 アンテナの各々は、単䞀の又は耇数のアンテナ玠子䟋えば、アンテナを構成する耇数のアンテナ玠子を有し、基地局装眮による無線信号の送受信のために䜿甚される。は、図に瀺したように耇数のアンテナを有し、耇数のアンテナは、䟋えばが䜿甚する耇数の呚波数垯域にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。なお、図にはが耇数のアンテナを有する䟋を瀺したが、は単䞀のアンテナを有しおもよい。 Each of the antennas 810 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission and reception of radio signals by the base station apparatus 820. The eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of antennas 810 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example. 26 shows an example in which the eNB 800 includes a plurality of antennas 810, but the eNB 800 may include a single antenna 810.

 基地局装眮は、コントロヌラ、メモリ、ネットワヌクむンタフェヌス及び無線通信むンタフェヌスを備える。 The base station apparatus 820 includes a controller 821, a memory 822, a network interface 823, and a wireless communication interface 825.

 コントロヌラは、䟋えば又はであっおよく、基地局装眮の䞊䜍レむダの様々な機胜を動䜜させる。䟋えば、コントロヌラは、無線通信むンタフェヌスにより凊理された信号内のデヌタからデヌタパケットを生成し、生成したパケットをネットワヌクむンタフェヌスを介しお転送する。コントロヌラは、耇数のベヌスバンドプロセッサからのデヌタをバンドリングするこずによりバンドルドパケットを生成し、生成したバンドルドパケットを転送しおもよい。たた、コントロヌラは、無線リ゜ヌス管理Radio Resource Control、無線ベアラ制埡Radio Bearer Control、移動性管理Mobility Management、流入制埡Admission Control又はスケゞュヌリングSchedulingなどの制埡を実行する論理的な機胜を有しおもよい。たた、圓該制埡は、呚蟺の又はコアネットワヌクノヌドず連携しお実行されおもよい。メモリは、及びを含み、コントロヌラにより実行されるプログラム、及び様々な制埡デヌタ䟋えば、端末リスト、送信電力デヌタ及びスケゞュヌリングデヌタなどを蚘憶する。 The controller 821 may be a CPU or a DSP, for example, and operates various functions of the upper layer of the base station apparatus 820. For example, the controller 821 generates a data packet from the data in the signal processed by the wireless communication interface 825, and transfers the generated packet via the network interface 823. The controller 821 may generate a bundled packet by bundling data from a plurality of baseband processors, and may transfer the generated bundled packet. In addition, the controller 821 is a logic that executes control such as radio resource control, radio bearer control, mobility management, inflow control, or scheduling. May have a typical function. Moreover, the said control may be performed in cooperation with a surrounding eNB or a core network node. The memory 822 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs executed by the controller 821 and various control data (for example, terminal list, transmission power data, scheduling data, and the like).

 ネットワヌクむンタフェヌスは、基地局装眮をコアネットワヌクに接続するための通信むンタフェヌスである。コントロヌラは、ネットワヌクむンタフェヌスを介しお、コアネットワヌクノヌド又は他のず通信しおもよい。その堎合に、ず、コアネットワヌクノヌド又は他のずは、論理的なむンタフェヌス䟋えば、むンタフェヌス又はむンタフェヌスにより互いに接続されおもよい。ネットワヌクむンタフェヌスは、有線通信むンタフェヌスであっおもよく、又は無線バックホヌルのための無線通信むンタフェヌスであっおもよい。ネットワヌクむンタフェヌスが無線通信むンタフェヌスである堎合、ネットワヌクむンタフェヌスは、無線通信むンタフェヌスにより䜿甚される呚波数垯域よりもより高い呚波数垯域を無線通信に䜿甚しおもよい。 The network interface 823 is a communication interface for connecting the base station device 820 to the core network 824. The controller 821 may communicate with the core network node or other eNB via the network interface 823. In that case, the eNB 800 and the core network node or another eNB may be connected to each other by a logical interface (for example, an S1 interface or an X2 interface). The network interface 823 may be a wired communication interface or a wireless communication interface for wireless backhaul. When the network interface 823 is a wireless communication interface, the network interface 823 may use a frequency band higher than the frequency band used by the wireless communication interface 825 for wireless communication.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、Long Term Evolution又はなどのいずれかのセルラヌ通信方匏をサポヌトし、アンテナを介しお、のセル内に䜍眮する端末に無線接続を提䟛する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、兞型的には、ベヌスバンドプロセッサ及び回路などを含み埗る。プロセッサは、䟋えば、笊号化埩号、倉調埩調及び倚重化逆倚重化などを行なっおよく、各レむダ䟋えば、、Medium Access Control、Radio Link Control及びPacket Data Convergence Protocolの様々な信号凊理を実行する。プロセッサは、コントロヌラの代わりに、䞊述した論理的な機胜の䞀郚又は党郚を有しおもよい。プロセッサは、通信制埡プログラムを蚘憶するメモリ、圓該プログラムを実行するプロセッサ及び関連する回路を含むモゞュヌルであっおもよく、プロセッサの機胜は、䞊蚘プログラムのアップデヌトにより倉曎可胜であっおもよい。たた、䞊蚘モゞュヌルは、基地局装眮のスロットに挿入されるカヌド若しくはブレヌドであっおもよく、又は䞊蚘カヌド若しくは䞊蚘ブレヌドに搭茉されるチップであっおもよい。䞀方、回路は、ミキサ、フィルタ及びアンプなどを含んでもよく、アンテナを介しお無線信号を送受信する。 The wireless communication interface 825 supports any cellular communication scheme such as LTE (Long Term Evolution) or LTE-Advanced, and provides a wireless connection to terminals located in the cell of the eNB 800 via the antenna 810. The wireless communication interface 825 may typically include a baseband (BB) processor 826, an RF circuit 827, and the like. The BB processor 826 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and each layer (for example, L1, MAC (Medium Access Control), RLC (Radio Link Control), and PDCP). Various signal processing of (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) is executed. The BB processor 826 may have some or all of the logical functions described above instead of the controller 821. The BB processor 826 may be a module that includes a memory that stores a communication control program, a processor that executes the program, and related circuits. The function of the BB processor 826 may be changed by updating the program. Good. Further, the module may be a card or a blade inserted into a slot of the base station apparatus 820, or a chip mounted on the card or the blade. On the other hand, the RF circuit 827 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 810.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数のプロセッサを含み、耇数のプロセッサは、䟋えばが䜿甚する耇数の呚波数垯域にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。たた、無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数の回路を含み、耇数の回路は、䟋えば耇数のアンテナ玠子にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。なお、図には無線通信むンタフェヌスが耇数のプロセッサ及び耇数の回路を含む䟋を瀺したが、無線通信むンタフェヌスは単䞀のプロセッサ又は単䞀の回路を含んでもよい。 The radio communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of BB processors 826 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 800, for example. In addition, the wireless communication interface 825 may include a plurality of RF circuits 827 as illustrated in FIG. 26, and the plurality of RF circuits 827 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements. 26 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 825 includes a plurality of BB processors 826 and a plurality of RF circuits 827, the wireless communication interface 825 includes a single BB processor 826 or a single RF circuit 827. But you can.

 図に瀺したにおいお、図を参照しお説明した切替郚及び又は制埡郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。あるいは、これらの構成芁玠の少なくずも䞀郚は、コントロヌラにおいお実装されおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、は、無線通信むンタフェヌスの䞀郚䟋えば、プロセッサ若しくは党郚、及び又はコントロヌラを含むモゞュヌルを搭茉し、圓該モゞュヌルにおいお切替郚及び又は制埡郚が実装されおもよい。この堎合に、䞊蚘モゞュヌルは、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラム換蚀するず、プロセッサに切替郚及び又は制埡郚の動䜜を実行させるためのプログラムを蚘憶し、圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。別の䟋ずしお、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムがにむンストヌルされ、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、プロセッサ及び又はコントロヌラが圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。以䞊のように、切替郚及び又は制埡郚を備える装眮ずしお、基地局装眮又は䞊蚘モゞュヌルが提䟛されおもよく、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムが提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘プログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓が提䟛されおもよい。 26, the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 825. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 821. As an example, the eNB 800 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 826) or all of the wireless communication interface 825 and / or the controller 821, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be. In this case, the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153). You may memorize | store and run the said program. As another example, a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 800, and the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the BB processor 826) and / or the controller 821 executes the program. May be. As described above, the eNB 800, the base station device 820, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153. A program may be provided. In addition, a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.

 たた、図に瀺したにおいお、図を参照しお説明した無線通信郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、回路においお実装されおもよい。たた、アンテナ郚は、アンテナにおいお実装されおもよい。たた、ネットワヌク通信郚は、コントロヌラ及び又はネットワヌクむンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。 26, the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 825 (for example, the RF circuit 827). Further, the antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 810. The network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 821 and / or the network interface 823.

 第の応甚䟋
 図は、本開瀺に係る技術が適甚され埗るの抂略的な構成の第の䟋を瀺すブロック図である。は、぀以䞊のアンテナ、基地局装眮、及びを有する。各アンテナ及びは、ケヌブルを介しお互いに接続され埗る。たた、基地局装眮及びは、光ファむバケヌブルなどの高速回線で互いに接続され埗る。
(Second application example)
FIG. 27 is a block diagram illustrating a second example of a schematic configuration of an eNB to which the technology according to the present disclosure may be applied. The eNB 830 includes one or more antennas 840, a base station apparatus 850, and an RRH 860. Each antenna 840 and RRH 860 may be connected to each other via an RF cable. Base station apparatus 850 and RRH 860 can be connected to each other via a high-speed line such as an optical fiber cable.

 アンテナの各々は、単䞀の又は耇数のアンテナ玠子䟋えば、アンテナを構成する耇数のアンテナ玠子を有し、による無線信号の送受信のために䜿甚される。は、図に瀺したように耇数のアンテナを有し、耇数のアンテナは、䟋えばが䜿甚する耇数の呚波数垯域にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。なお、図にはが耇数のアンテナを有する䟋を瀺したが、は単䞀のアンテナを有しおもよい。 Each of the antennas 840 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of radio signals by the RRH 860. The eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of antennas 840 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example. 27 illustrates an example in which the eNB 830 includes a plurality of antennas 840, but the eNB 830 may include a single antenna 840.

 基地局装眮は、コントロヌラ、メモリ、ネットワヌクむンタフェヌス、無線通信むンタフェヌス及び接続むンタフェヌスを備える。コントロヌラ、メモリ及びネットワヌクむンタフェヌスは、図を参照しお説明したコントロヌラ、メモリ及びネットワヌクむンタフェヌスず同様のものである。 The base station device 850 includes a controller 851, a memory 852, a network interface 853, a wireless communication interface 855, and a connection interface 857. The controller 851, the memory 852, and the network interface 853 are the same as the controller 821, the memory 822, and the network interface 823 described with reference to FIG.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、又はなどのいずれかのセルラヌ通信方匏をサポヌトし、及びアンテナを介しお、に察応するセクタ内に䜍眮する端末に無線接続を提䟛する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、兞型的には、プロセッサなどを含み埗る。プロセッサは、接続むンタフェヌスを介しおの回路ず接続されるこずを陀き、図を参照しお説明したプロセッサず同様のものである。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数のプロセッサを含み、耇数のプロセッサは、䟋えばが䜿甚する耇数の呚波数垯域にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。なお、図には無線通信むンタフェヌスが耇数のプロセッサを含む䟋を瀺したが、無線通信むンタフェヌスは単䞀のプロセッサを含んでもよい。 The wireless communication interface 855 supports a cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and provides a wireless connection to a terminal located in a sector corresponding to the RRH 860 via the RRH 860 and the antenna 840. The wireless communication interface 855 may typically include a BB processor 856 and the like. The BB processor 856 is the same as the BB processor 826 described with reference to FIG. 26 except that the BB processor 856 is connected to the RF circuit 864 of the RRH 860 via the connection interface 857. The wireless communication interface 855 includes a plurality of BB processors 856 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of BB processors 856 may respectively correspond to a plurality of frequency bands used by the eNB 830, for example. 27 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 855 includes a plurality of BB processors 856, the wireless communication interface 855 may include a single BB processor 856.

 接続むンタフェヌスは、基地局装眮無線通信むンタフェヌスをず接続するためのむンタフェヌスである。接続むンタフェヌスは、基地局装眮無線通信むンタフェヌスずずを接続する䞊蚘高速回線での通信のための通信モゞュヌルであっおもよい。 The connection interface 857 is an interface for connecting the base station device 850 (wireless communication interface 855) to the RRH 860. The connection interface 857 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line that connects the base station apparatus 850 (wireless communication interface 855) and the RRH 860.

 たた、は、接続むンタフェヌス及び無線通信むンタフェヌスを備える。 In addition, the RRH 860 includes a connection interface 861 and a wireless communication interface 863.

 接続むンタフェヌスは、無線通信むンタフェヌスを基地局装眮ず接続するためのむンタフェヌスである。接続むンタフェヌスは、䞊蚘高速回線での通信のための通信モゞュヌルであっおもよい。 The connection interface 861 is an interface for connecting the RRH 860 (wireless communication interface 863) to the base station device 850. The connection interface 861 may be a communication module for communication on the high-speed line.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、アンテナを介しお無線信号を送受信する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、兞型的には、回路などを含み埗る。回路は、ミキサ、フィルタ及びアンプなどを含んでもよく、アンテナを介しお無線信号を送受信する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数の回路を含み、耇数の回路は、䟋えば耇数のアンテナ玠子にそれぞれ察応しおもよい。なお、図には無線通信むンタフェヌスが耇数の回路を含む䟋を瀺したが、無線通信むンタフェヌスは単䞀の回路を含んでもよい。 The wireless communication interface 863 transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840. The wireless communication interface 863 may typically include an RF circuit 864 and the like. The RF circuit 864 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives wireless signals via the antenna 840. The wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864 as illustrated in FIG. 27, and the plurality of RF circuits 864 may correspond to, for example, a plurality of antenna elements, respectively. 27 illustrates an example in which the wireless communication interface 863 includes a plurality of RF circuits 864, the wireless communication interface 863 may include a single RF circuit 864.

 図に瀺したにおいお、図を参照しお説明した切替郚及び又は制埡郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌス及び又は無線通信むンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。あるいは、これらの構成芁玠の少なくずも䞀郚は、コントロヌラにおいお実装されおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、は、無線通信むンタフェヌスの䞀郚䟋えば、プロセッサ若しくは党郚、及び又はコントロヌラを含むモゞュヌルを搭茉し、圓該モゞュヌルにおいお切替郚及び又は制埡郚が実装されおもよい。この堎合に、䞊蚘モゞュヌルは、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラム換蚀するず、プロセッサに切替郚及び又は制埡郚の動䜜を実行させるためのプログラムを蚘憶し、圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。別の䟋ずしお、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムがにむンストヌルされ、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、プロセッサ及び又はコントロヌラが圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。以䞊のように、切替郚及び又は制埡郚を備える装眮ずしお、基地局装眮又は䞊蚘モゞュヌルが提䟛されおもよく、プロセッサを切替郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムが提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘プログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓が提䟛されおもよい。 In the eNB 830 illustrated in FIG. 27, the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the wireless communication interface 863. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the controller 851. As an example, the eNB 830 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 856) or all of the wireless communication interface 855 and / or the controller 851, and the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 are mounted in the module. May be. In this case, the module executes a program for causing the processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153). You may memorize | store and run the said program. As another example, a program for causing a processor to function as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153 is installed in the eNB 830, and the radio communication interface 855 (for example, the BB processor 856) and / or the controller 851 executes the program. May be. As described above, the eNB 830, the base station device 850, or the module may be provided as a device including the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153, and the processor functions as the switching unit 151 and / or the control unit 153. A program may be provided. In addition, a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.

 たた、図に瀺したにおいお、䟋えば、図を参照しお説明した無線通信郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、回路においお実装されおもよい。たた、アンテナ郚は、アンテナにおいお実装されおもよい。たた、ネットワヌク通信郚は、コントロヌラ及び又はネットワヌクむンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。 In the eNB 830 illustrated in FIG. 27, for example, the radio communication unit 120 described with reference to FIG. 8 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 863 (for example, the RF circuit 864). The antenna unit 110 may be mounted on the antenna 840. The network communication unit 130 may be implemented in the controller 851 and / or the network interface 853.

 端末装眮に関する応甚䟋
 第の応甚䟋
 図は、本開瀺に係る技術が適甚され埗るスマヌトフォンの抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。スマヌトフォンは、プロセッサ、メモリ、ストレヌゞ、倖郚接続むンタフェヌス、カメラ、センサ、マむクロフォン、入力デバむス、衚瀺デバむス、スピヌカ、無線通信むンタフェヌス、぀以䞊のアンテナスむッチ、぀以䞊のアンテナ、バス、バッテリヌ及び補助コントロヌラを備える。
<9.2. Application examples related to terminal devices>
(First application example)
FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a smartphone 900 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied. The smartphone 900 includes a processor 901, a memory 902, a storage 903, an external connection interface 904, a camera 906, a sensor 907, a microphone 908, an input device 909, a display device 910, a speaker 911, a wireless communication interface 912, one or more antenna switches 915. One or more antennas 916, a bus 917, a battery 918 and an auxiliary controller 919 are provided.

 プロセッサは、䟋えば又はSystem on Chipであっおよく、スマヌトフォンのアプリケヌションレむダ及びその他のレむダの機胜を制埡する。メモリは、及びを含み、プロセッサにより実行されるプログラム及びデヌタを蚘憶する。ストレヌゞは、半導䜓メモリ又はハヌドディスクなどの蚘憶媒䜓を含み埗る。倖郚接続むンタフェヌスは、メモリヌカヌド又はUniversal Serial Busデバむスなどの倖付けデバむスをスマヌトフォンぞ接続するためのむンタフェヌスである。 The processor 901 may be, for example, a CPU or a SoC (System on Chip), and controls the functions of the application layer and other layers of the smartphone 900. The memory 902 includes a RAM and a ROM, and stores programs executed by the processor 901 and data. The storage 903 can include a storage medium such as a semiconductor memory or a hard disk. The external connection interface 904 is an interface for connecting an external device such as a memory card or a USB (Universal Serial Bus) device to the smartphone 900.

 カメラは、䟋えば、Charge Coupled Device又はComplementary Metal Oxide Semiconductorなどの撮像玠子を有し、撮像画像を生成する。センサは、䟋えば、枬䜍センサ、ゞャむロセンサ、地磁気センサ及び加速床センサなどのセンサ矀を含み埗る。マむクロフォンは、スマヌトフォンぞ入力される音声を音声信号ぞ倉換する。入力デバむスは、䟋えば、衚瀺デバむスの画面䞊ぞのタッチを怜出するタッチセンサ、キヌパッド、キヌボヌド、ボタン又はスむッチなどを含み、ナヌザからの操䜜又は情報入力を受け付ける。衚瀺デバむスは、液晶ディスプレむ又は有機発光ダむオヌドディスプレむなどの画面を有し、スマヌトフォンの出力画像を衚瀺する。スピヌカは、スマヌトフォンから出力される音声信号を音声に倉換する。 The camera 906 includes, for example, an image sensor such as a CCD (Charge Coupled Device) or a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor), and generates a captured image. The sensor 907 may include a sensor group such as a positioning sensor, a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an acceleration sensor. The microphone 908 converts sound input to the smartphone 900 into an audio signal. The input device 909 includes, for example, a touch sensor that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 910, a keypad, a keyboard, a button, or a switch, and receives an operation or information input from a user. The display device 910 has a screen such as a liquid crystal display (LCD) or an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, and displays an output image of the smartphone 900. The speaker 911 converts an audio signal output from the smartphone 900 into audio.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、又はなどのいずれかのセルラヌ通信方匏をサポヌトし、無線通信を実行する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、兞型的には、プロセッサ及び回路などを含み埗る。プロセッサは、䟋えば、笊号化埩号、倉調埩調及び倚重化逆倚重化などを行なっおよく、無線通信のための様々な信号凊理を実行する。䞀方、回路は、ミキサ、フィルタ及びアンプなどを含んでもよく、アンテナを介しお無線信号を送受信する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、プロセッサ及び回路を集積したワンチップのモゞュヌルであっおもよい。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数のプロセッサ及び耇数の回路を含んでもよい。なお、図には無線通信むンタフェヌスが耇数のプロセッサ及び耇数の回路を含む䟋を瀺したが、無線通信むンタフェヌスは単䞀のプロセッサ又は単䞀の回路を含んでもよい。 The wireless communication interface 912 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication. The wireless communication interface 912 may typically include a BB processor 913, an RF circuit 914, and the like. The BB processor 913 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication. On the other hand, the RF circuit 914 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives radio signals via the antenna 916. The wireless communication interface 912 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 913 and the RF circuit 914 are integrated. The wireless communication interface 912 may include a plurality of BB processors 913 and a plurality of RF circuits 914 as illustrated in FIG. FIG. 28 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 912 includes a plurality of BB processors 913 and a plurality of RF circuits 914. However, the wireless communication interface 912 includes a single BB processor 913 or a single RF circuit 914. But you can.

 さらに、無線通信むンタフェヌスは、セルラヌ通信方匏に加えお、近距離無線通信方匏、近接無線通信方匏又は無線Local Area Network方匏などの他の皮類の無線通信方匏をサポヌトしおもよく、その堎合に、無線通信方匏ごずのプロセッサ及び回路を含んでもよい。 Furthermore, the wireless communication interface 912 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN (Local Area Network) method in addition to the cellular communication method. In that case, a BB processor 913 and an RF circuit 914 for each wireless communication method may be included.

 アンテナスむッチの各々は、無線通信むンタフェヌスに含たれる耇数の回路䟋えば、異なる無線通信方匏のための回路の間でアンテナの接続先を切り替える。 Each of the antenna switches 915 switches the connection destination of the antenna 916 among a plurality of circuits (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems) included in the wireless communication interface 912.

 アンテナの各々は、単䞀の又は耇数のアンテナ玠子䟋えば、アンテナを構成する耇数のアンテナ玠子を有し、無線通信むンタフェヌスによる無線信号の送受信のために䜿甚される。スマヌトフォンは、図に瀺したように耇数のアンテナを有しおもよい。なお、図にはスマヌトフォンが耇数のアンテナを有する䟋を瀺したが、スマヌトフォンは単䞀のアンテナを有しおもよい。 Each of the antennas 916 includes a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 912. The smartphone 900 may include a plurality of antennas 916 as illustrated in FIG. Note that FIG. 28 illustrates an example in which the smartphone 900 includes a plurality of antennas 916, but the smartphone 900 may include a single antenna 916.

 さらに、スマヌトフォンは、無線通信方匏ごずにアンテナを備えおもよい。その堎合に、アンテナスむッチは、スマヌトフォンの構成から省略されおもよい。 Furthermore, the smartphone 900 may include an antenna 916 for each wireless communication method. In that case, the antenna switch 915 may be omitted from the configuration of the smartphone 900.

 バスは、プロセッサ、メモリ、ストレヌゞ、倖郚接続むンタフェヌス、カメラ、センサ、マむクロフォン、入力デバむス、衚瀺デバむス、スピヌカ、無線通信むンタフェヌス及び補助コントロヌラを互いに接続する。バッテリヌは、図䞭に砎線で郚分的に瀺した絊電ラむンを介しお、図に瀺したスマヌトフォンの各ブロックぞ電力を䟛絊する。補助コントロヌラは、䟋えば、スリヌプモヌドにおいお、スマヌトフォンの必芁最䜎限の機胜を動䜜させる。 The bus 917 connects the processor 901, memory 902, storage 903, external connection interface 904, camera 906, sensor 907, microphone 908, input device 909, display device 910, speaker 911, wireless communication interface 912, and auxiliary controller 919 to each other. . The battery 918 supplies electric power to each block of the smartphone 900 shown in FIG. 28 through a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing. For example, the auxiliary controller 919 operates the minimum necessary functions of the smartphone 900 in the sleep mode.

 図に瀺したスマヌトフォンにおいお、図を参照しお説明した情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。あるいは、これらの構成芁玠の少なくずも䞀郚は、プロセッサ又は補助コントロヌラにおいお実装されおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、スマヌトフォンは、無線通信むンタフェヌスの䞀郚䟋えば、プロセッサ若しくは党郚、プロセッサ、及び又は補助コントロヌラを含むモゞュヌルを搭茉し、圓該モゞュヌルにおいお情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚が実装されおもよい。この堎合に、䞊蚘モゞュヌルは、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラム換蚀するず、プロセッサに情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚の動䜜を実行させるためのプログラムを蚘憶し、圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。別の䟋ずしお、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムがスマヌトフォンにむンストヌルされ、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、プロセッサ、プロセッサ、及び又は補助コントロヌラが圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。以䞊のように、情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚を備える装眮ずしおスマヌトフォン又は䞊蚘モゞュヌルが提䟛されおもよく、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムが提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘プログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓が提䟛されおもよい。 28, the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912. In the smartphone 900 illustrated in FIG. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the processor 901 or the auxiliary controller 919. As an example, the smartphone 900 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 913) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 912, the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller 919, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the module is included in the module. The control unit 243 may be mounted. In this case, the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243). ) And the program may be executed. As another example, a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the smartphone 900, and the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the BB processor 913), the processor 901, and / or the auxiliary controller is installed. 919 may execute the program. As described above, the smartphone 900 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is provided. May be provided. In addition, a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.

 たた、図に瀺したスマヌトフォンにおいお、䟋えば、図を参照しお説明した無線通信郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、回路においお実装されおもよい。たた、アンテナ郚は、アンテナにおいお実装されおもよい。 28, for example, the wireless communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the wireless communication interface 912 (for example, the RF circuit 914). The antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 916.

 第の応甚䟋
 図は、本開瀺に係る技術が適甚され埗るカヌナビゲヌション装眮の抂略的な構成の䞀䟋を瀺すブロック図である。カヌナビゲヌション装眮は、プロセッサ、メモリ、Global Positioning Systemモゞュヌル、センサ、デヌタむンタフェヌス、コンテンツプレヌダ、蚘憶媒䜓むンタフェヌス、入力デバむス、衚瀺デバむス、スピヌカ、無線通信むンタフェヌス、぀以䞊のアンテナスむッチ、぀以䞊のアンテナ及びバッテリヌを備える。
(Second application example)
FIG. 29 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a schematic configuration of a car navigation device 920 to which the technology according to the present disclosure can be applied. The car navigation device 920 includes a processor 921, a memory 922, a GPS (Global Positioning System) module 924, a sensor 925, a data interface 926, a content player 927, a storage medium interface 928, an input device 929, a display device 930, a speaker 931, and wireless communication. The interface 933 includes one or more antenna switches 936, one or more antennas 937, and a battery 938.

 プロセッサは、䟋えば又はであっおよく、カヌナビゲヌション装眮のナビゲヌション機胜及びその他の機胜を制埡する。メモリは、及びを含み、プロセッサにより実行されるプログラム及びデヌタを蚘憶する。 The processor 921 may be a CPU or SoC, for example, and controls the navigation function and other functions of the car navigation device 920. The memory 922 includes RAM and ROM, and stores programs and data executed by the processor 921.

 モゞュヌルは、衛星から受信される信号を甚いお、カヌナビゲヌション装眮の䜍眮䟋えば、緯床、経床及び高床を枬定する。センサは、䟋えば、ゞャむロセンサ、地磁気センサ及び気圧センサなどのセンサ矀を含み埗る。デヌタむンタフェヌスは、䟋えば、図瀺しない端子を介しお車茉ネットワヌクに接続され、車速デヌタなどの車䞡偎で生成されるデヌタを取埗する。 The GPS module 924 measures the position (for example, latitude, longitude, and altitude) of the car navigation device 920 using GPS signals received from GPS satellites. The sensor 925 may include a sensor group such as a gyro sensor, a geomagnetic sensor, and an atmospheric pressure sensor. The data interface 926 is connected to the in-vehicle network 941 through a terminal (not shown), for example, and acquires data generated on the vehicle side such as vehicle speed data.

 コンテンツプレヌダは、蚘憶媒䜓むンタフェヌスに挿入される蚘憶媒䜓䟋えば、又はに蚘憶されおいるコンテンツを再生する。入力デバむスは、䟋えば、衚瀺デバむスの画面䞊ぞのタッチを怜出するタッチセンサ、ボタン又はスむッチなどを含み、ナヌザからの操䜜又は情報入力を受け付ける。衚瀺デバむスは、又はディスプレむなどの画面を有し、ナビゲヌション機胜又は再生されるコンテンツの画像を衚瀺する。スピヌカは、ナビゲヌション機胜又は再生されるコンテンツの音声を出力する。 The content player 927 reproduces content stored in a storage medium (for example, CD or DVD) inserted into the storage medium interface 928. The input device 929 includes, for example, a touch sensor, a button, or a switch that detects a touch on the screen of the display device 930, and receives an operation or information input from the user. The display device 930 has a screen such as an LCD or an OLED display, and displays a navigation function or an image of content to be reproduced. The speaker 931 outputs the navigation function or the audio of the content to be played back.

 無線通信むンタフェヌスは、又はなどのいずれかのセルラヌ通信方匏をサポヌトし、無線通信を実行する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、兞型的には、プロセッサ及び回路などを含み埗る。プロセッサは、䟋えば、笊号化埩号、倉調埩調及び倚重化逆倚重化などを行なっおよく、無線通信のための様々な信号凊理を実行する。䞀方、回路は、ミキサ、フィルタ及びアンプなどを含んでもよく、アンテナを介しお無線信号を送受信する。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、プロセッサ及び回路を集積したワンチップのモゞュヌルであっおもよい。無線通信むンタフェヌスは、図に瀺したように耇数のプロセッサ及び耇数の回路を含んでもよい。なお、図には無線通信むンタフェヌスが耇数のプロセッサ及び耇数の回路を含む䟋を瀺したが、無線通信むンタフェヌスは単䞀のプロセッサ又は単䞀の回路を含んでもよい。 The wireless communication interface 933 supports any cellular communication method such as LTE or LTE-Advanced, and performs wireless communication. The wireless communication interface 933 may typically include a BB processor 934, an RF circuit 935, and the like. The BB processor 934 may perform, for example, encoding / decoding, modulation / demodulation, and multiplexing / demultiplexing, and performs various signal processing for wireless communication. On the other hand, the RF circuit 935 may include a mixer, a filter, an amplifier, and the like, and transmits and receives a radio signal via the antenna 937. The wireless communication interface 933 may be a one-chip module in which the BB processor 934 and the RF circuit 935 are integrated. The wireless communication interface 933 may include a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935 as shown in FIG. 29 shows an example in which the wireless communication interface 933 includes a plurality of BB processors 934 and a plurality of RF circuits 935, the wireless communication interface 933 includes a single BB processor 934 or a single RF circuit 935. But you can.

 さらに、無線通信むンタフェヌスは、セルラヌ通信方匏に加えお、近距離無線通信方匏、近接無線通信方匏又は無線方匏などの他の皮類の無線通信方匏をサポヌトしおもよく、その堎合に、無線通信方匏ごずのプロセッサ及び回路を含んでもよい。 Further, the wireless communication interface 933 may support other types of wireless communication methods such as a short-range wireless communication method, a proximity wireless communication method, or a wireless LAN method in addition to the cellular communication method. A BB processor 934 and an RF circuit 935 may be included for each communication method.

 アンテナスむッチの各々は、無線通信むンタフェヌスに含たれる耇数の回路䟋えば、異なる無線通信方匏のための回路の間でアンテナの接続先を切り替える。 Each of the antenna switches 936 switches the connection destination of the antenna 937 among a plurality of circuits included in the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, circuits for different wireless communication systems).

 アンテナの各々は、単䞀の又は耇数のアンテナ玠子䟋えば、アンテナを構成する耇数のアンテナ玠子を有し、無線通信むンタフェヌスによる無線信号の送受信のために䜿甚される。カヌナビゲヌション装眮は、図に瀺したように耇数のアンテナを有しおもよい。なお、図にはカヌナビゲヌション装眮が耇数のアンテナを有する䟋を瀺したが、カヌナビゲヌション装眮は単䞀のアンテナを有しおもよい。 Each of the antennas 937 has a single or a plurality of antenna elements (for example, a plurality of antenna elements constituting a MIMO antenna), and is used for transmission / reception of a radio signal by the radio communication interface 933. The car navigation device 920 may include a plurality of antennas 937 as shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 29 illustrates an example in which the car navigation apparatus 920 includes a plurality of antennas 937, but the car navigation apparatus 920 may include a single antenna 937.

 さらに、カヌナビゲヌション装眮は、無線通信方匏ごずにアンテナを備えおもよい。その堎合に、アンテナスむッチは、カヌナビゲヌション装眮の構成から省略されおもよい。 Furthermore, the car navigation device 920 may include an antenna 937 for each wireless communication method. In that case, the antenna switch 936 may be omitted from the configuration of the car navigation device 920.

 バッテリヌは、図䞭に砎線で郚分的に瀺した絊電ラむンを介しお、図に瀺したカヌナビゲヌション装眮の各ブロックぞ電力を䟛絊する。たた、バッテリヌは、車䞡偎から絊電される電力を蓄積する。 The battery 938 supplies power to each block of the car navigation apparatus 920 shown in FIG. 29 via a power supply line partially shown by a broken line in the drawing. Further, the battery 938 stores electric power supplied from the vehicle side.

 図に瀺したカヌナビゲヌション装眮においお、図を参照しお説明した情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌスにおいお実装されおもよい。あるいは、これらの構成芁玠の少なくずも䞀郚は、プロセッサにおいお実装されおもよい。䞀䟋ずしお、カヌナビゲヌション装眮は、無線通信むンタフェヌスの䞀郚䟋えば、プロセッサ若しくは党郚及び又はプロセッサを含むモゞュヌルを搭茉し、圓該モゞュヌルにおいお情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚が実装されおもよい。この堎合に、䞊蚘モゞュヌルは、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラム換蚀するず、プロセッサに情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚の動䜜を実行させるためのプログラムを蚘憶し、圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。別の䟋ずしお、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムがカヌナビゲヌション装眮にむンストヌルされ、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、プロセッサ及び又はプロセッサが圓該プログラムを実行しおもよい。以䞊のように、情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚を備える装眮ずしおカヌナビゲヌション装眮又は䞊蚘モゞュヌルが提䟛されおもよく、プロセッサを情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのプログラムが提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘プログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓が提䟛されおもよい。 In the car navigation device 920 shown in FIG. 29, the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 described with reference to FIG. Alternatively, at least some of these components may be implemented in the processor 921. As an example, the car navigation device 920 includes a module including a part (for example, the BB processor 934) or the whole of the wireless communication interface 933 and / or the processor 921, and the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 in the module. May be implemented. In this case, the module is a program for causing the processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 (in other words, a program for causing the processor to execute the operation of the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243). ) And the program may be executed. As another example, a program for causing a processor to function as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243 is installed in the car navigation device 920, and the wireless communication interface 933 (for example, the BB processor 934) and / or the processor 921 The program may be executed. As described above, the car navigation device 920 or the module may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243, and the processor functions as the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243. A program may be provided. In addition, a readable recording medium in which the program is recorded may be provided.

 たた、図に瀺したカヌナビゲヌション装眮においお、䟋えば、図を参照しお説明した無線通信郚は、無線通信むンタフェヌス䟋えば、回路においお実装されおもよい。たた、アンテナ郚は、アンテナにおいお実装されおもよい。 29, for example, the radio communication unit 220 described with reference to FIG. 9 may be implemented in the radio communication interface 933 (for example, the RF circuit 935). The antenna unit 210 may be mounted on the antenna 937.

 たた、本開瀺に係る技術は、䞊述したカヌナビゲヌション装眮の぀以䞊のブロックず、車茉ネットワヌクず、車䞡偎モゞュヌルずを含む車茉システム又は車䞡ずしお実珟されおもよい。即ち、情報取埗郚及び又は制埡郚を備える装眮ずしお車茉システム又は車䞡が提䟛されおもよい。車䞡偎モゞュヌルは、車速、゚ンゞン回転数又は故障情報などの車䞡偎デヌタを生成し、生成したデヌタを車茉ネットワヌクぞ出力する。 Also, the technology according to the present disclosure may be realized as an in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 including one or more blocks of the car navigation device 920 described above, an in-vehicle network 941, and a vehicle side module 942. That is, the in-vehicle system (or vehicle) 940 may be provided as a device including the information acquisition unit 241 and / or the control unit 243. The vehicle-side module 942 generates vehicle-side data such as vehicle speed, engine speed, or failure information, and outputs the generated data to the in-vehicle network 941.

 たずめ
 ここたで、図図を参照しお、本開瀺の実斜圢態に係る通信装眮及び各凊理を説明した。本開瀺に係る実斜圢態によれば、
<< 10. Summary >>
Up to this point, the communication device and each process according to an embodiment of the present disclosure have been described with reference to FIGS. According to embodiments according to the present disclosure,

 第第の実斜圢態
 第の実斜圢態第の実斜圢態では、基地局は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺、及び、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングを基準ずする第のに぀いおの指瀺を行う制埡郚ず、を備える。
(1) First to Fourth Embodiments In the first embodiment / second embodiment, the base station 100 uses the first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for the UL and the UL band is The switching unit 151 that switches the operation mode for the UL band between the second mode used for both DL and UL by the division, and the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band And a control unit 153 that issues an instruction for the first TA as a reference and an instruction for the second TA based on the DL reception timing for the UL band.

 第の実斜圢態では、基地局は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングず、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングずを同期させる制埡郚ず、を備える。 In the third embodiment, the base station 100 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. A switching unit 151 for switching the operation mode for the UL band, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the DL transmission timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band, and the UL And a control unit 153 that synchronizes the DL transmission timing for the band.

 第の実斜圢態では、端末装眮は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する情報取埗郚ず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域における送信のための凊理を行い、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、䞊蚘垯域における受信及び送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、を備える。制埡郚は、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドであるか又は䞊蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、䞊蚘垯域に察応するの垯域に぀いおの受信タむミングに基づいお、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの送信タむミングを調敎する。 In the fourth embodiment, the terminal device 200 includes a first mode in which the UL band of the FDD is used for UL, and a second mode in which the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. Information acquisition unit 241 for acquiring information indicating the switching of the operation mode for the UL band between, and when the operation mode is the first mode, processing for UL transmission in the UL band is performed. And a control unit 243 that performs processing for DL reception and DL transmission in the UL band when the operation mode is the second mode. The control unit 243 determines whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode based on the DL reception timing for the DL band of the FDD corresponding to the UL band. The UL transmission timing for the UL band is adjusted.

 これにより、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。具䜓的には、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に、基地局における受信タむミングの同期が実珟される。 Thereby, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. Specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, synchronization of UL reception timing in the base station is realized.

 第の実斜圢態
 第の実斜圢態では、基地局は、の垯域がに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、䞊蚘垯域が時分割により及びの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、䞊蚘垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、䞊蚘動䜜モヌドが䞊蚘第のモヌドである堎合にデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知する制埡郚ず、を備える。
(2) Fifth Embodiment In the fifth embodiment, the base station 100 uses the FDD UL band for the UL, and the UL band is used for both DL and UL by time division. A switching unit 151 that switches an operation mode for the UL band between the second mode and a subframe that transmits ACK / NACK for DL data when the operation mode is the second mode. And a control unit 153 for notifying the terminal device 200 of the information regarding.

 これにより、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に圓該垯域においおより良奜に無線通信を行うこずが可胜になる。具䜓的には、䟋えば、の垯域を時分割で及びの䞡方に䜿甚する堎合に、デヌタに぀いおのが適切に送信される。 Thereby, for example, when the UL band of the FDD is used for both DL and UL in a time division manner, wireless communication can be performed better in the UL band. Specifically, for example, when the UL band of FDD is used for both DL and UL in time division, ACK / NACK for DL data is appropriately transmitted.

 以䞊、添付図面を参照しながら本開瀺の奜適な実斜圢態を説明したが、本開瀺は係る䟋に限定されないこずは蚀うたでもない。圓業者であれば、特蚱請求の範囲に蚘茉された範疇内においお、各皮の倉曎䟋又は修正䟋に想到し埗るこずは明らかであり、それらに぀いおも圓然に本開瀺の技術的範囲に属するものず了解される。 As mentioned above, although preferred embodiment of this indication was described referring an accompanying drawing, it cannot be overemphasized that this indication is not limited to the example concerned. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made within the scope of the claims, and these are naturally within the technical scope of the present disclosure. Understood.

 䟋えば、基地局及び端末装眮を含むシステムが、、又はこれらに準ずる通信芏栌に準拠したシステムである䟋を説明したが、本開瀺は係る䟋に限定されない。䟋えば、システムは、他の通信芏栌に準拠したシステムであっおもよい。 For example, although the example in which the system including the base station and the terminal device is a system compliant with LTE, LTE-Advanced, or a communication standard based on these has been described, the present disclosure is not limited to such an example. For example, the system may be a system that complies with other communication standards.

 たた、本明现曞の凊理における凊理ステップは、必ずしもフロヌチャヌト又はシヌケンス図に蚘茉された順序に沿っお時系列に実行されなくおよい。䟋えば、凊理における凊理ステップは、フロヌチャヌト又はシヌケンス図ずしお蚘茉した順序ず異なる順序で実行されおも、䞊列的に実行されおもよい。 In addition, the processing steps in the processing of the present specification do not necessarily have to be executed in time series according to the order described in the flowchart or the sequence diagram. For example, the processing steps in the processing may be executed in an order different from the order described as a flowchart or a sequence diagram, or may be executed in parallel.

 たた、本明现曞の装眮䟋えば、基地局、基地局装眮若しくは基地局装眮のためのモゞュヌル、又は、端末装眮若しくは端末装眮のためのモゞュヌルに備えられるプロセッサ䟋えば、、などを䞊蚘装眮の構成芁玠䟋えば、切替郚及び若しくは制埡郚、又は、情報取埗郚及び若しくは制埡郚ずしお機胜させるためのコンピュヌタプログラム換蚀するず、䞊蚘プロセッサに䞊蚘装眮の構成芁玠の動䜜を実行させるためのコンピュヌタプログラムも䜜成可胜である。たた、圓該コンピュヌタプログラムを蚘録した蚘録媒䜓も提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘コンピュヌタプログラムを蚘憶するメモリず、䞊蚘コンピュヌタプログラムを実行可胜な぀以䞊のプロセッサずを備える装眮䟋えば、基地局、基地局装眮若しくは基地局装眮のためのモゞュヌル、又は、端末装眮若しくは端末装眮のためのモゞュヌルも提䟛されおもよい。たた、䞊蚘装眮の構成芁玠䟋えば、切替郚及び若しくは制埡郚、又は、情報取埗郚及び若しくは制埡郚の動䜜を含む方法も、本開瀺に係る技術に含たれる。 In addition, a processor (for example, a CPU, a DSP, or the like) provided in a device of the present specification (for example, a base station, a base station device, a module for a base station device, or a terminal device or a module for a terminal device) A computer program for functioning as a component of the device (for example, a switching unit and / or a control unit, or an information acquisition unit and / or a control unit) (in other words, the processor executes the operation of the component of the device) A computer program) can be created. Moreover, a recording medium on which the computer program is recorded may be provided. An apparatus (for example, a base station, a base station apparatus, a module for a base station apparatus, a terminal apparatus, or a device including a memory for storing the computer program and one or more processors capable of executing the computer program) A module for a terminal device may also be provided. In addition, a method including the operation of the components of the device (for example, the switching unit and / or the control unit or the information acquisition unit and / or the control unit) is also included in the technology according to the present disclosure.

 たた、本明现曞に蚘茉された効果は、あくたで説明的又は䟋瀺的なものであっお限定的ではない。぀たり、本開瀺に係る技術は、䞊蚘効果ずずもに、又は䞊蚘効果に代えお、本明现曞の蚘茉から圓業者には明らかな他の効果を奏しうる。 In addition, the effects described in the present specification are merely illustrative or illustrative, and are not limited. That is, the technology according to the present disclosure can exhibit other effects that are apparent to those skilled in the art from the description of the present specification in addition to or instead of the above effects.

 なお、以䞋のような構成も本開瀺の技術的範囲に属する。

 Frequency Division Duplexのアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、
 前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺、及び、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺を行う制埡郚ず、
を備える装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺、及び前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺を行う、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺、及び前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺は、前蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする同䞀の端末装眮ぞの指瀺である、前蚘又はに蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、タむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知により、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺、及び前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺を行う、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘タむミングアドバンスコマンドは、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのためのタむミングアドバンスコマンドず、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのためのタむミングアドバンスコマンドずを含む、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのための前蚘タむミングアドバンスコマンドは、第のタむミングアドバンスグルヌプのためのコマンドであり、
 前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのための前蚘タむミングアドバンスコマンドは、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスグルヌプずは異なる第のタむミングアドバンスグルヌプのためのコマンドである、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、タむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知により、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンス及び前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのうちの䞀方に぀いおの指瀺を行い、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスず前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスずの間のオフセットを瀺す情報の通知により、前蚘第のタむミングアドバンス及び前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスのうちの他方に぀いおの指瀺を行う、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺は、前蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトしない第の端末装眮ぞの指瀺であり、
 前蚘第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺は、前蚘第のモヌドをサポヌトする第の端末装眮ぞの指瀺である、
前蚘又はに蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第の端末装眮は、前蚘ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎する端末装眮であり、
 前蚘第の端末装眮は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎する端末装眮である、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域における同期信号の送信のための凊理を行う、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のモヌドは、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚され、䞔぀、無線フレヌムのうちの少なくずも所定のサブフレヌムにおいお前蚘アップリンク垯域がダりンリンクに䜿甚されるモヌドであり、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、無線フレヌムのうちの前蚘所定のサブフレヌムにおいお前蚘同期信号が送信されるように、前蚘アップリンク垯域における前蚘同期信号の送信のための凊理を行う、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングずを同期させる制埡郚ず、
を備える装眮。

 前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク受信タむミングは、少なくずも前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングよりも所定時間だけ早い、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘所定時間は、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンクからダりンリンクぞの切替えに芁する時間である、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク受信タむミングは、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングず同期し、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングよりも前蚘所定時間だけ早く、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘第のモヌドから前蚘第のモヌドぞの前蚘動䜜モヌドの切替えに応じお前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のタむミングアドバンスが前蚘所定時間だけ長くなるように、圓該タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺を行う、
前蚘又はに蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘切替えのサブフレヌム前のサブフレヌムにおけるタむミングアドバンスコマンドの通知により、前蚘タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺を行う、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘所定時間に察応するオフセットを瀺す情報の通知により、前蚘タむミングアドバンスに぀いおの前蚘指瀺を行う、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドであっおも、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお同期信号は送信されない、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報を、端末装眮に通知する、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、
を備え、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドであるか又は前蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎する、
装眮。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺、及び、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺を行うこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺、及び、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺を行うこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺、及び、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスに぀いおの指瀺を行うこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングずを同期させるこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングずを同期させるこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク送信タむミングずを同期させるこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドであるか又は前蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドであるか又は前蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドであるか又は前蚘第のモヌドであるかによらず、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、
を備え、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎し、又は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎する、
装眮。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎し、又は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎し、又は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該ダりンリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎し、又は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずする第のタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、
を備え、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずするタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎する、
装眮。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずするタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずするタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのダりンリンク受信タむミングず、圓該アップリンク垯域に぀いおの圓該ダりンリンク受信タむミングを基準ずするタむミングアドバンスを瀺す情報ずに基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおアップリンク送信タむミングを調敎するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。
The following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
(1)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band A control unit for instructing timing advance;
A device comprising:
(2)
The control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance when the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
(3)
(1) or (2), wherein the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance are instructions to the same terminal device that supports the second mode. The device described in 1.
(4)
The apparatus according to (3), wherein the control unit performs the instruction for the first timing advance and the instruction for the second timing advance in response to a notification of a timing advance command.
(5)
The apparatus according to (4), wherein the timing advance command includes a timing advance command for the first timing advance and a timing advance command for the second timing advance.
(6)
The timing advance command for the first timing advance is a command for a first timing advance group;
The timing advance command for the second timing advance is a command for a second timing advance group different from the first timing advance group.
The apparatus according to (5) above.
(7)
The control unit gives an instruction for one of the first timing advance and the second timing advance in response to the notification of the timing advance command, and the first timing advance and the second timing advance The apparatus according to any one of (3) to (6), wherein an instruction for the other of the first timing advance and the second timing advance is given by notification of information indicating an offset between the first timing advance and the second timing advance .
(8)
The instruction for the first timing advance is an instruction to a first terminal device that does not support the second mode;
The instruction for the second timing advance is an instruction to a second terminal device that supports the second mode.
The apparatus according to (1) or (2).
(9)
The first terminal device is a terminal device that adjusts uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on downlink reception timing for the downlink band,
The second terminal apparatus adjusts an uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Is,
The apparatus according to (8) above.
(10)
The control unit according to any one of (1) to (9), wherein when the operation mode is the second mode, the control unit performs a process for transmitting a synchronization signal in the uplink band. Equipment.
(11)
In the second mode, the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, and the uplink band is used for the downlink in at least a predetermined subframe of the radio frame. Mode
The control unit transmits the synchronization signal in the uplink band so that the synchronization signal is transmitted in the predetermined subframe of a radio frame when the operation mode is the second mode. Do the processing for,
The apparatus according to (10) above.
(12)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band A switching unit for switching the operation mode for
When the operation mode is the second mode, a control unit that synchronizes the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band When,
A device comprising:
(13)
The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is at least a predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when at least the operation mode is the second mode. Equipment.
(14)
The apparatus according to (13), wherein the predetermined time is a time required for switching from the uplink to the downlink in the uplink band.
(15)
The uplink reception timing for the uplink band is synchronized with the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band when the operation mode is the first mode, and the operation mode is the second mode. In some cases, the predetermined time earlier than the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band,
The control unit may increase the timing advance of uplink transmission in the uplink band by the predetermined time in response to the switching of the operation mode from the first mode to the second mode. Give instructions about the
The device according to (13) or (14).
(16)
The apparatus according to (15), wherein the control unit issues the instruction regarding the timing advance by notification of a timing advance command in a subframe six subframes before the switching.
(17)
The apparatus according to (15), wherein the control unit issues the instruction regarding the timing advance by notification of information indicating an offset corresponding to the predetermined time.
(18)
The apparatus according to any one of (12) to (17), wherein a synchronization signal is not transmitted in the uplink band even when the operation mode is the second mode.
(19)
The device according to any one of (1) to (18), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
(20)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit is based on a downlink reception timing for a FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band,
apparatus.
(21)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
Including methods.
(22)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(23)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
An instruction for a first timing advance based on a downlink reception timing for an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band, and a second based on a downlink reception timing for the uplink band Giving instructions about timing advance,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(24)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
Including methods.
(25)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(26)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Synchronizing the downlink transmission timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink transmission timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode; ,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(27)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
Including methods.
(28)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(29)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Regardless of whether the operation mode is the first mode or the second mode, the uplink is based on the downlink reception timing for the downlink band of the FDD corresponding to the uplink band. Adjusting the uplink transmission timing for the bandwidth,
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(30)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit, when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band On the basis of the information indicating the first timing advance based on the uplink transmission timing for the uplink band, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on the downlink reception timing;
apparatus.
(31)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
Including methods.
(32)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(33)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink reception timing for the FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the downlink band are used as a reference. The uplink transmission timing for the uplink band is adjusted based on the information indicating one timing advance, or the downlink reception timing for the uplink band and the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on information indicating a second timing advance based on
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(34)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The control unit indicates a downlink advance timing for the uplink band and a timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band when the operation mode is the second mode. Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink band based on the information,
apparatus.
(35)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
Including methods.
(36)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(37)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
When the operation mode is the second mode, based on downlink reception timing for the uplink band and information indicating timing advance based on the downlink reception timing for the uplink band Adjusting uplink transmission timing for the uplink bandwidth;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.

 たた、以䞋のような構成も本開瀺の技術的範囲に属する。

 Frequency Division Duplexのアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのAcknowledgementNegative Acknowledgementを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知する制埡郚ず、
を備える装眮。

 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタを含む、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタをさらに含む、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎し、
 前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のアップリンクサブフレヌムである、
前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘情報は、前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報である、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補は、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、アップリンクサブフレヌムの数が最小であるアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補である、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にアップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する他の情報を、端末装眮に通知する、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘アップリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるアップリンクデヌタである、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎し、
 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のダりンリンクサブフレヌムである、
前蚘又はに蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘他の情報は、前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報である、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補は、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、ダりンリンクサブフレヌムの数が最小であるアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補である、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、個別のシグナリングにより、前蚘情報を端末装眮に通知する、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、前蚘情報を端末装眮に通知する、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報を、端末装眮に通知する、前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知するこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、
を備え、
 前蚘取埗郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗し、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行う、
装眮。

 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタを含む、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタをさらに含む、前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘取埗郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にアップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する他の情報を取埗し、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘他の情報に基づいお、アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのの受信のための凊理を行う、
前蚘のいずれか項に蚘茉の装眮。

 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のダりンリンクサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘他の情報に基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの枬定を制埡する、
前蚘に蚘茉の装眮。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知するこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。

 プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
を含む方法。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラム。

 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗するこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行うこずず、
をプロセッサに実行させるためのプログラムを蚘録した読み取り可胜な蚘録媒䜓。
The following configurations also belong to the technical scope of the present disclosure.
(1)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
A control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A device comprising:
(2)
The apparatus according to (1), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
(3)
The apparatus according to (2), wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(4)
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to any one of (1) to (3).
(5)
The subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. Frame,
The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to (4) above.
(6)
The first uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of uplink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to (5) above.
(7)
The control unit notifies the terminal device of other information related to a subframe in which ACK / NACK for uplink data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode, (1) to (6) The apparatus according to any one of (1).
(8)
The apparatus according to (7), wherein the uplink data is uplink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(9)
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to (7) or (8).
(10)
The subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. ACK / NACK subframe for link data,
The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to (9) above.
(11)
The second uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of downlink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to (10) above.
(12)
The device according to any one of (1) to (11), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information by individual signaling.
(13)
The device according to any one of (1) to (12), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of the information in the system information.
(14)
The apparatus according to any one of (1) to (13), wherein the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.
(15)
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
(16)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
apparatus.
(17)
The apparatus according to (16), wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a downlink band of an FDD corresponding to the uplink band.
(18)
The apparatus according to (17), wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.
(19)
The acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
The apparatus according to any one of (16) to (18).
(20)
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
The control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
The apparatus according to (19) above.
(21)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(22)
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.
(23)
Depending on the processor
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
(24)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
A program that causes a processor to execute.
(25)
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division Obtaining information indicating operation mode switching for the band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band Processing for reception and uplink transmission;
Obtaining information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Performing a process for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode;
A readable recording medium on which a program for causing a processor to execute is recorded.

     システム
   基地局
   切替郚
   制埡郚
   基地局
   情報取埗郚
   制埡郚
1 System 100 Base Station 151 Switching Unit 153 Control Unit 200 Base Station 241 Information Acquisition Unit 243 Control Unit

Claims (20)

 Frequency Division Duplexのアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替える切替郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのAcknowledgementNegative Acknowledgementを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知する制埡郚ず、
を備える装眮。
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD (Frequency Division Duplex) is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division. A switching unit for switching an operation mode for the uplink band;
A control unit for notifying a terminal device of information on a subframe for transmitting ACK (Acknowledgement) / NACK (Negative Acknowledgement) for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
A device comprising:
 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタを含む、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in a FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band.  前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタをさらに含む、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 2, wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.  前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎し、
 前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のアップリンクサブフレヌムである、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe is an uplink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus of claim 1.
 前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘情報は、前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報である、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The subframe is a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data defined for a first uplink / downlink configuration candidate of the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. Frame,
The information is information indicating the first uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to claim 4.
 前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補は、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、アップリンクサブフレヌムの数が最小であるアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補である、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The first uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of uplink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to claim 5.  前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にアップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する他の情報を、端末装眮に通知する、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of other information related to a subframe in which ACK / NACK for uplink data is transmitted when the operation mode is the second mode. .  前蚘アップリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるアップリンクデヌタである、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 7, wherein the uplink data is uplink data transmitted in the uplink band.  前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを、耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の䞭で倉曎し、
 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のダりンリンクサブフレヌムである、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The control unit changes an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates when the operation mode is the second mode,
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates.
The apparatus according to claim 7.
 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のために定矩された、アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信甚のサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘他の情報は、前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補を瀺す情報である、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The subframe transmitting an ACK / NACK for the uplink data is defined as an uplink defined for a second uplink / downlink configuration candidate among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. ACK / NACK subframe for link data,
The other information is information indicating the second uplink / downlink configuration candidate.
The apparatus according to claim 9.
 前蚘第のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補は、前蚘耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補のうちの、ダりンリンクサブフレヌムの数が最小であるアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補である、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The second uplink / downlink configuration candidate is an uplink / downlink configuration candidate having a minimum number of downlink subframes among the plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates. The apparatus according to claim 10.  前蚘制埡郚は、個別のシグナリングにより、前蚘情報を端末装眮に通知する、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of the information by individual signaling.  前蚘制埡郚は、システム情報の䞭で、前蚘情報を端末装眮に通知する、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control unit notifies the terminal apparatus of the information in the system information.  前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおのアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌションを瀺す情報を、端末装眮に通知する、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 1, wherein the control unit notifies the terminal device of information indicating an uplink / downlink configuration for the uplink band.  プロセッサにより、
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間で、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドを切り替えるこずず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を、端末装眮に通知するこずず、
を含む方法。
Depending on the processor
Between the first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and the second mode in which the uplink band is used for both the downlink and the uplink by time division, the uplink band Switching the operation mode about
Notifying the terminal device of information regarding subframes for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode;
Including methods.
 のアップリンク垯域がアップリンクに䜿甚される第のモヌドず、前蚘アップリンク垯域が時分割によりダりンリンク及びアップリンクの䞡方に䜿甚される第のモヌドずの間での、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの動䜜モヌドの切替えを瀺す情報を取埗する取埗郚ず、
 前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるアップリンク送信のための凊理を行い、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘アップリンク垯域におけるダりンリンク受信及びアップリンク送信のための凊理を行う制埡郚ず、
を備え、
 前蚘取埗郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する情報を取埗し、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘情報に基づいお、ダりンリンクデヌタに぀いおのの送信のための凊理を行う、
装眮。
The uplink between a first mode in which the uplink band of FDD is used for the uplink and a second mode in which the uplink band is used for both downlink and uplink by time division An acquisition unit for acquiring information indicating switching of an operation mode for a band;
When the operation mode is the first mode, a process for uplink transmission in the uplink band is performed, and when the operation mode is the second mode, the downlink in the uplink band A control unit that performs processing for reception and uplink transmission;
With
The acquisition unit acquires information on a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for transmitting ACK / NACK for downlink data based on the information on the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
apparatus.
 前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に察応するのダりンリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタを含む、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 16, wherein the downlink data includes downlink data transmitted in an FDD downlink band corresponding to the uplink band.  前蚘ダりンリンクデヌタは、前蚘アップリンク垯域においお送信されるダりンリンクデヌタをさらに含む、請求項に蚘茉の装眮。 The apparatus according to claim 17, wherein the downlink data further includes downlink data transmitted in the uplink band.  前蚘取埗郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合にアップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信するサブフレヌムに関する他の情報を取埗し、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘動䜜モヌドが前蚘第のモヌドである堎合に、前蚘サブフレヌムに関する前蚘他の情報に基づいお、アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのの受信のための凊理を行う、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The acquisition unit acquires other information related to a subframe for transmitting ACK / NACK for uplink data when the operation mode is the second mode,
The control unit performs processing for reception of ACK / NACK for uplink data based on the other information regarding the subframe when the operation mode is the second mode.
The apparatus of claim 16.
 前蚘アップリンクデヌタに぀いおのを送信する前蚘サブフレヌムは、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの耇数のアップリンクダりンリンクコンフィギュレヌション候補の間で共通のダりンリンクサブフレヌムであり、
 前蚘制埡郚は、前蚘他の情報に基づいお、前蚘アップリンク垯域に぀いおの枬定を制埡する、
請求項に蚘茉の装眮。
The subframe transmitting ACK / NACK for the uplink data is a downlink subframe common among a plurality of uplink / downlink configuration candidates for the uplink band;
The control unit controls measurement of the uplink band based on the other information;
The apparatus of claim 19.
PCT/JP2015/079223 2014-12-12 2015-10-15 Device Ceased WO2016092953A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2014-251663 2014-12-12
JP2014251663 2014-12-12

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016092953A1 true WO2016092953A1 (en) 2016-06-16

Family

ID=56107148

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2015/079223 Ceased WO2016092953A1 (en) 2014-12-12 2015-10-15 Device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2016092953A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111788858A (en) * 2018-02-23 2020-10-16 䞉星电子株匏䌚瀟 Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002345014A (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-29 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile communication system
WO2013192601A2 (en) * 2012-06-22 2013-12-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Data transmission in carrier aggregation with different carrier configurations

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002345014A (en) * 2001-05-16 2002-11-29 Ntt Docomo Inc Mobile communication system
WO2013192601A2 (en) * 2012-06-22 2013-12-27 Qualcomm Incorporated Data transmission in carrier aggregation with different carrier configurations

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ETRI: "Remaining issues for TDD-FDD CA", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#76B R1-141265, 31 March 2014 (2014-03-31) *
IAESI: "Scenarios of TDD-FDD joint operation in the same frequency band", 3GPP TSG-RAN WG1#74 RL-133217, 19 August 2013 (2013-08-19) *
LEI WAN ET AL., 2013 IEEE, pages 49 - 54 *

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN111788858A (en) * 2018-02-23 2020-10-16 䞉星电子株匏䌚瀟 Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system
US11844137B2 (en) 2018-02-23 2023-12-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system
CN111788858B (en) * 2018-02-23 2024-05-31 䞉星电子株匏䌚瀟 Method and apparatus for retransmitting uplink data configured in discontinuous reception in a wireless communication system

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220408298A1 (en) Electronic device and method for wireless communications
JP6617717B2 (en) apparatus
JP6432655B2 (en) COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CN105993201B (en) Communication device and method
JP6194896B2 (en) COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, TERMINAL DEVICE, AND PROGRAM
US20200275500A1 (en) Device and method
WO2016163206A1 (en) Terminal device, wireless communication device, wireless communication method, and computer program
JP7268955B2 (en) Terminal device, communication method, and program
KR20210108960A (en) Electronic devices and methods used for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage media
WO2020144973A1 (en) Communication device, communication method, and program
WO2018128029A1 (en) Terminal device, base station device, method and recording medium
JP6265204B2 (en) COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL DEVICE
WO2014132515A1 (en) User equipment, program, and communication control method
JP6209898B2 (en) COMMUNICATION CONTROL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND TERMINAL DEVICE
US20230046108A1 (en) Electronic device and method for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage medium
US10028256B2 (en) Apparatus
WO2016092953A1 (en) Device
WO2017038192A1 (en) Apparatus and method
KR20220083682A (en) Electronic device and method for wireless communication, and computer-readable storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 15868642

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 15868642

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP